CONTROLS for Your BMW 4 Series 4 Door Second Generation (2020-2025)

Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Dashboard  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
In the vicinity of the steering wheel  
1
Power windows, individual 91  
Unlocking  
Locking  
2
Seating comfort features  
Memory function 108  
5
Lights  
Light switch 153  
3
4
Exterior mirror adjustment button 106  
Central locking system 86  
Exterior lighting off  
Daytime driving lights 156  
32  
 
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Parking lights 154  
With Steering Assistant 214:  
Cruise Control, Distance Control  
and lane keeping on/off  
Automatic headlight control 154  
Adaptive lighting functions 156  
High Beam Assistant 152  
Cruise Control: store the speed  
Low-beam headlights 154  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept  
suggested speed 211  
Instrument lighting 157  
Interrupt or continue cruise control  
Right roadside parking light 154  
Left roadside parking light 154  
Active Cruise Control: increase  
distance  
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-  
tance  
Cruise Control rocker switch  
6
Turn signal lever  
Turn signal 151  
9
Instrument cluster 129  
10 Steering wheel buttons, right  
Displaying menu bar in instru-  
High-beam headlights, head-  
light flasher 151  
ment cluster 129  
High Beam Assistant 152  
Volume, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Trip data 144  
G-Meter 147  
Voice activation system 54  
7
Shift paddles 120  
Steering wheel buttons, left  
Manual Speed Limiter 199  
8
Selecting menu contents in instru-  
ment cluster 129  
Changing the station/track, see  
Owner's Manual for Navigation,  
Entertainment, Communication 6  
Depending on the equipment:  
Cruise Control on/off 201  
Depending on the equipment:  
Active Cruise Control on/off 204  
33  
 
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
Telephone, see Owner's Manual  
for Navigation, Entertainment and  
Communication 6  
Wipers 159  
Rain sensor 160  
Knurled wheel for selecting con-  
figuration menus for instrument  
cluster and Head-up display 129  
Cleaning the windshield 161  
Using infotainment selection lists  
in the instrument cluster 140  
12  
Horn, entire surface  
11 Wiper lever  
13 Adjusting the steering wheel 108  
14  
Unlocking the hood 316  
15  
Opening and closing cargo area  
79  
16 Fold-out compartment 262  
In the vicinity of the center console  
1
Control display 50  
2
Ventilation 249  
34  
 
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
3
Hazard warning system 332  
7
Driving Experience Control 123  
SPORT drive mode  
Climate control 242  
COMFORT drive mode  
Defrost function 247  
ECO PRO drive mode  
Rear window defroster 248  
8
9
Turning drive-ready state on/off  
115  
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for  
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-  
cation 6  
Auto Start/Stop function 115  
Parking assistance systems 221  
Panorama view 228  
Adjusting the volume  
Station/title forward  
Station/title back  
Dynamic Stability Control 193  
4
5
6
Button for glove compartment 261  
Controller with buttons 51  
Automatic Hold 126  
10 Selector lever 118  
Parking brake 125  
35  
 
 
Dashboard  
CONTROLS  
In the vicinity of the headliner  
1
Emergency Call, SOS 334  
4
5
Reading lights 158  
Interior lights 158  
2
3
Operating the electric glass sun-  
roof 93  
Indicator light, front passenger  
airbag 165  
36  
 
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Sensors of the vehicle  
Vehicle features and options Cameras  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
Front camera  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-  
cle:  
The front camera is located in the radiator  
grille.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Camera behind the windshield  
Camera behind the windshield.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
The camera behind the windshield is located  
near the interior mirror.  
37  
 
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,  
for instance by a fogged up windshield or  
labels.  
Top view cameras  
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
With open doors or open cargo area.  
When driving toward bright lights or strong  
reflections, e.g., setting sun.  
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.  
The camera has overheated due to exces-  
sive temperatures and temporarily turned  
off.  
One exterior mirror camera is located at the  
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.  
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-  
ately after vehicle delivery.  
Rearview camera  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
Radar sensors  
Safety information  
Warning  
The rearview camera is located in the badge  
on the rear of the vehicle.  
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the  
driver assistance systems can be impaired by  
external influences, e.g., interference. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
age. Watch the surrounding traffic situation  
closely, be ready to take over steering and  
braking at any time, and actively intervene  
where appropriate.  
Functional requirement of the  
cameras  
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 340.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 341.  
System limits of the cameras  
The cameras may not work properly, e.g.,  
show something that is incorrect, in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.  
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in  
tight curves.  
38  
 
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Front radar sensor  
Functional requirement of the radar  
sensors  
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and  
clear.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 340.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 341.  
System limits of the radar sensors  
The function of the radar sensors may be re-  
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The front radar sensor is located in the front  
bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.  
Radar sensors, side, front  
In case of iced-up sensors.  
If sensors are covered such as by labels,  
films or a license-plate carrier.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.  
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-  
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow  
hills, vehicles or trailers.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the front bumper.  
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the  
road.  
Radar sensors, side, rear  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
The radar sensors are located on the side of  
the rear bumper.  
39  
 
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement of the  
ultrasonic sensors  
Ultrasonic sensors  
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean  
and clear.  
Ultrasonic sensors, front  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 340.  
Vehicle care, refer to page 341.  
System limits of the ultrasonic  
sensors  
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-  
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in  
the following situations:  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the front bumper.  
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by  
stickers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, rear  
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-  
stance due to parking damage.  
After improper paint work on the vehicle in  
the area of the sensors.  
▷
▷
For small children and animals.  
For persons with certain clothing, for in-  
stance jacket.  
▷
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of  
the lane.  
In case of external interference with the  
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-  
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic  
sources.  
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-  
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side  
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high  
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-  
treme heat, or strong wind.  
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  
vehicles.  
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.  
With moving objects.  
With elevated, protruding objects such as  
ledges.  
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and  
smooth surfaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors for the parking assis-  
tance systems are located on the sides of the  
front and rear bumpers.  
40  
 
 
Sensors of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
▷
In the case of objects with fine surfaces or  
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.  
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.  
With small and low objects, for instance  
boxes.  
▷
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance  
curbs, can be outside of the detection  
ranges of the sensors.  
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in  
foam material.  
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.  
In automatic car washes.  
In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed  
bumps.  
▷
▷
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.  
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of  
the vehicle is not taken into account by the  
ultrasonic sensors.  
If applicable, a Check Control message will be  
displayed when the system limits are reached.  
41  
 
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Operating state of the vehicle  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Vehicle features and options  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Additional information:  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
Warning  
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in  
one of the three states:  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.  
Standby state.  
Drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
Idle state  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
Principle  
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched  
off.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
General information  
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening  
from the outside and after exiting and locking.  
Establishing the sleep mode  
automatically  
The sleep mode is established automatically  
such as in the following situations:  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes  
place on the vehicle.  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is  
low.  
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:  
one or both front doors will be opened after  
driving when exiting the vehicle.  
42  
 
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-  
Activating deep sleep mode  
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or  
when the low-beam headlights are switched  
on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Deep sleep mode"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Establishing idle state when  
opening the front doors  
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established  
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,  
all passengers must exit the vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
5. "Turn off after opening door"  
Press the button on the trunk to access the  
vehicle while in deep sleep mode. Deep sleep  
mode remains on in this case.  
Establishing the sleep mode  
manually  
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-  
pletion of trip:  
Deactivating deep sleep mode  
▷
Turn off the function on the control display.  
Press and hold the volume but-  
ton on the radio until the OFF in-  
dicator on the instrument cluster  
disappears.  
▷
Driving with the vehicle.  
Standby state  
Deep sleep mode  
Principle  
When standby state is switched on, most func-  
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-  
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.  
Principle  
Deep sleep mode is activated to prevent the  
vehicle battery from discharging when the ve-  
hicle is stationary for several weeks.  
General information  
The vehicle is in the standby state after the  
front doors are opened from the outside.  
In deep sleep mode, the vehicle functions are  
limited to the essentials.  
General information  
Manually setting to standby  
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than  
three months, some special measures are nec-  
essary. For more information, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-  
hicle is automatically set to idle state.  
43  
 
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation.  
Using the volume button on the radio  
Press the volume button on the  
radio. The control display and  
the instrument cluster illuminate.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Using the Start/Stop button  
Press the Start/Stop button. The  
control display and the instru-  
ment cluster illuminate.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
NOTICE  
Drive-ready state  
Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or  
repeatedly starting the vehicle in rapid suc-  
cession can cause the starter to overheat.  
This also results in unburned or inadequately  
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-  
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage  
to property. Avoid repeated starting of the  
vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid  
succession.  
Principle  
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to  
starting the engine.  
General information  
Some vehicle functions can only be used with  
the drive-ready state switched on.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
Safety information  
General information  
DANGER  
Drive-ready state is turned on  
using the Start/Stop button.  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is  
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-  
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain  
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.  
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
44  
 
 
Operating state of the vehicle  
CONTROLS  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The ignition is activated automatically for a  
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-  
gine starts.  
Most of the indicator lights and warning lights  
on the instrument cluster illuminate for differ-  
ent lengths of time.  
Gasoline engine  
Depending on the motorization, the full drive  
power may not be available for approximately  
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this  
case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.  
Additional information:  
Power gauge, refer to page 141.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The activated drive-ready state is indicated  
in the instrument cluster, depending on the  
equipment, by the display of information re-  
quired for driving or the READY display.  
Turning off drive-ready state  
1. Engage selector lever position P with the  
vehicle stopped.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
The engine is switched off. The vehicle  
switches into standby state.  
45  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
BMW iDrive  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Main menu  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
General information  
The main menu is divided into different areas.  
Display and operating  
concept  
Overview  
Principle  
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-  
ating concept and includes a wide range of  
functions.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions  
can be operated as follows:  
1
Widgets  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.  
2
3
4
5
Status information  
Configuration bar for main display  
Temperature setting  
Menu bar  
Via the Controller.  
Via the touchpad.  
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
Via the operating elements on the steering  
wheel.  
Menu bar  
Additional information:  
Instrument cluster, refer to page 129.  
Apps menu  
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A  
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the  
filter to see the apps you want.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-  
played.  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
▷
"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are  
displayed.  
46  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-  
tions are displayed.  
Main display  
The main display shows real-time information  
and dynamic content such as the navigation  
map. This display also contains buttons and  
lets you jump to the desired menu.  
"Recently used": The most recently used  
apps are displayed.  
Media menu  
Status information  
Access to entertainment system functions,  
e.g., radio stations or external device pairing.  
General information  
Communication menu  
The status field can be found in the upper area  
of the control display. Status information is dis-  
played in the form of icons. Depending on the  
equipment and national-market version, differ-  
ent icons are available.  
Access to telephone and message function  
as well as pairing and management of mobile  
devices, e.g., smartphones.  
Navigation menu  
Telephone status information  
Access to navigation system, destination  
entry, and traffic information. Configurable  
map views and other functions such as points  
of interest.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Active call.  
Signal strength.  
SIM card missing.  
Climate menu  
The Climate menu provides access to all  
climate control functions.  
Entertainment status information  
Apple CarPlay© menu  
Depending on national-market version with  
associated function: Access to Apple CarPlay.  
Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of cer-  
tain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via  
iDrive.  
Icon Meaning  
USB audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Smartphone audio.  
Connected Music with Spotify.  
Time shift.  
Android Auto© menu  
Depending on national-market version with  
associated function: Access to Android Auto.  
Android Auto enables the secure use of certain  
functions of a compatible Android smartphone  
via iDrive.  
Wi-Fi.  
Apple CarPlay.  
Android Auto.  
Widgets  
Satellite radio is switched on.  
Widgets show real-time information and dy-  
namic content such as current media or paired  
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-  
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.  
47  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Status information messages  
Icon  
Function  
Change between capital and  
lower-case letters.  
Icon Meaning  
Number of notifications.  
Check Control message.  
Enter a blank space.  
Switching between languages.  
Use voice control.  
Suppress private information.  
Do not disturb.  
Confirm entry.  
Message.  
Shift the input area to the left  
or right.  
Additional information:  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Entry comparison  
When entering data from a database such as  
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed  
down for each character entered, with charac-  
ters being added as necessary.  
Other status information  
Icon Meaning  
Sound output active.  
Activating/deactivating the functions  
Sound output deactivated.  
Activation word active.  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
Destination guidance active.  
Go to quick access.  
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.  
Selecting the menu item enables or disables  
the function.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Function is activated.  
Function is deactivated.  
Wireless charging active.  
Park Distance Control: sound active.  
Enabling/disabling audible feedback  
For some functions, audio confirmation is  
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating  
the control display.  
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-  
vated.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Input and display  
2. "Vehicle"  
Letters and numbers  
Letters and numbers can be entered using the  
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice  
control, depending on vehicle equipment.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Sound"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Quick access  
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,  
certain settings, and app recommendations.  
48  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The function will work immediately. This  
means for instance that the connection is es-  
tablished when a phone number is selected.  
Input  
Operation  
Show  
Swipe from top to bottom on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller up.  
Tap the icon on the status  
bar.  
Swipe from the bottom up on the  
quick link. control display.  
Slide the controller down.  
Deleting shortcuts  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.  
3. "Delete shortcut"  
Hide  
BMW Curved Display  
Activating/deactivating pop-ups  
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed  
automatically on the control display. Some of  
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.  
Principle  
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen  
display in the instrument panel that is curved  
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display  
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-  
er's side and the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Pop-ups"  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW  
Curved Display in the Care chapter.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Shortcuts  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 343.  
General information  
The iDrive functions can be stored on the  
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance  
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone  
numbers and menu entries.  
Overview  
Storing a function  
1. Select the desired function.  
2. Press and hold the desired function.  
3. "Add to shortcuts"  
Shortcuts can only be created with an active  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
1
Instrument cluster 129  
Control display 50  
Executing a function  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
2
2. Tap the desired shortcut.  
49  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Switching the control display on/off  
automatically  
Control display  
The control display is turned on automatically  
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the  
control display is needed for operation.  
Principle  
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-  
trol display.  
In certain situations, the control display is  
switched off automatically, for instance if no  
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-  
eral minutes.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Switching the control display on/off  
manually  
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control  
display.  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
2. "Screen off"  
Tap the control display to turn it on again.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
Warning  
2. "Vehicle"  
Objects in the area in front of a display can  
slip and damage the display. There is a risk  
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not  
place objects in the area in front of a display.  
3. "Displays"  
4. "Control display"  
5. "Brightness at night"  
6. Make the desired setting.  
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-  
ness control may not be clearly visible.  
Overview  
System limits  
In the case of very high temperatures on the  
control display, for instance due to intense so-  
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced  
down to complete deactivation. Once the  
temperature is reduced, for instance through  
shade or air conditioning system, the normal  
functions are restored.  
Control display.  
50  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Operation  
Controller  
▷
▷
▷
Rotate the Controller to switch between  
menu options, for example.  
Principle  
The Controller can be used to select menu  
items and enter the settings. The buttons can  
be used to open the menus directly.  
Overview  
Press the Controller to select a menu  
option, for example.  
Controller  
Buttons on the Controller  
Button Function  
Call up the main menu.  
Slide the Controller in four directions to  
switch between menus, for example.  
Call up the Media/Radio menu.  
Go to Phone menu.  
Call up the navigation map.  
Call up the destination input menu  
for navigation.  
Operating via the Controller  
Go to previous menu.  
Opening the main menu  
Press the button.  
Call up the Options menu.  
The main menu is displayed.  
51  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
Selecting menu items  
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu  
item is highlighted.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
2. Press the Controller.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-  
bers.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the  
main display.  
2.  
: confirm entry.  
Additional information:  
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.  
4. Select the desired main display.  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 57.  
Selecting a widget  
1. Use the Controller to select widgets.  
Deleting an entry  
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the de-  
sired widget is selected.  
Icon Function  
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-  
ber.  
3. Press the Controller.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right  
quickly.  
▷
Press the button.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
1. Select the desired menu item using the  
Controller.  
2. Press and hold the Controller.  
52  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Function  
Operation  
Operation via touchpad  
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the  
upper area of the touch-  
pad.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive  
functions can be operated with the controller  
touchpad.  
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the  
score.  
lower area of the touch-  
pad.  
The touchpad is located on the Controller.  
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not  
use any objects.  
Using the map  
The map in the navigation system can be  
moved via the touchpad.  
Selecting functions  
1.  
Apps menu  
Tap the map on the control display and then  
continue operation using the touchpad.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Touchpad"  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate di-  
rection.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Display menu. Tap once.  
Entering letters and numbers  
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on  
the control display.  
Using alphabetical lists  
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries  
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-  
try exists.  
▷
Always enter associated characters such as  
accents or periods so that the letter can be  
clearly recognized.  
▷
The set language determines what input  
is possible. Where necessary, enter special  
characters via the Controller.  
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.  
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed  
in the list.  
Additional information:  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 57.  
Operation via control display  
Entering special characters  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the con-  
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.  
Function  
Operation  
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the  
You can tap on menu items and widgets.  
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do  
not use any objects.  
ter.  
touchpad.  
Enter a blank  
space.  
Swipe to the right in the  
center of the touchpad.  
Opening the main menu  
Tap on the icon.  
The main menu is displayed.  
53  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Deleting an entry  
Adjusting the main display  
The main display can be adjusted in the main  
menu.  
Icon Function  
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.  
1.  
Tap on the icon.  
2. Swipe the configuration bar on the right  
side of the screen to the left.  
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-  
ters or numbers.  
3. Select the desired main display.  
Using the map  
The navigation map can be moved on the con-  
trol display.  
Sorting apps  
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-  
sired icon and move it to the desired location.  
Function  
Operation  
Move map.  
Swipe in the appropriate  
direction.  
Switching between menus  
A new display opens after a menu item is se-  
lected.  
Enlarge/shrink  
map.  
Drag in or out with the fin-  
gers.  
Select the arrow symbol.  
The current menu closes and the previous  
menu is displayed.  
Display menu.  
Tap once.  
Using alphabetical lists  
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-  
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can  
be displayed in a text box.  
Calling up the context menu  
Depending on the menu item, a context menu  
with additional options can be displayed.  
Press and hold the desired menu item.  
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.  
A letter box is displayed.  
The menu consists of various areas, for in-  
stance:  
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.  
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual.  
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-  
played in the list.  
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as  
shortcut.  
BMW Intelligent Personal  
Assistant  
Entering letters and numbers  
Input  
1. If necessary, tap the  
display.  
icon or control  
Principle  
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a  
personal assistant that enables natural voice  
operation of various vehicle functions. The  
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate  
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions  
and automating habits.  
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.  
54  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-  
tive.  
General information  
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-  
able depending on national-market version.  
▷
Speaking the activation word.  
The microphones on the driver's or front  
passenger's side are active with the follow-  
ing voice control, depending on where the  
activation word was spoken.  
▷
The system includes special microphones  
on the driver side and the front passenger  
side.  
▷
▷
Say the commands and numbers fluently  
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,  
and speed.  
Then say the command. The activation word  
and the command can be spoken without  
pause in one sentence.  
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-  
ken.  
Microphone button on steering wheel  
Functional requirements  
1.  
Press button briefly.  
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-  
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.  
2. Say the command.  
Activation word  
General information  
Setting the system language, refer to  
page 57.  
▷
Always say commands in the configured  
system language.  
Saying the activation word will start the Per-  
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-  
tens.  
For the full range of functions, you must acti-  
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-  
tions:  
▷
Online speech processing, refer to  
page 58.  
Preset activation word  
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can  
be activated and deactivated.  
▷
For all settings under  
Data protection, refer to page 65.  
Activation word, refer to page 55.  
BMW ID or a driver profile.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
▷
▷
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the  
ConnectedDrive Store.  
▷
Suggestions, refer to page 58.  
Activating the voice control system  
7. ""Hello BMW""  
Personal activation word  
General information  
In addition to the preset activation word, a  
personal activation word can be set up with  
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-  
sonal activation word can also be changed or  
deleted.  
There are various methods for activating the  
voice control feature:  
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel briefly.  
55  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The activation word should consist of multiple  
syllables to ensure good recognition.  
▷
▷
Slide the Controller to the right or left.  
Press the Controller.  
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary  
for the activation word and does not need to  
be spoken.  
Possible commands  
General information  
1.  
Apps menu  
Commands can be used to give instructions  
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant  
providing assistance.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Wake word"  
For example, you can call contacts, navigate  
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions  
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions  
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the  
Automatic Parking Assistant.  
7. "Personal wake word"  
8. "Set"  
Most content on the control display can be  
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list  
entries.  
9. "Start recording"  
Activation word from third-party providers  
Depending on the national-market version,  
some third-party providers provide digital voice  
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.  
Help for voice control  
▷
›Voice commands‹: have possible example  
commands suggested.  
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-  
nected via Apple CarPlay.  
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have  
information on the operating principle of the  
voice control announced.  
Supported voice assistants can be used with a  
connected smartphone in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands  
for voice control announced.  
The activation word from connected third-  
party providers can be used in addition to your  
preset or personal activation word from BMW.  
Additional example commands for the cur-  
rent context are displayed in the widget of  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Sample commands  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹  
›Drive me to JFK airport‹  
›Play a classical music station‹  
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹  
›Activate the climate control‹  
›Increase the ACC distance‹  
›Sport mode‹  
5. "Additional speech assistants"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Canceling voice control  
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering  
wheel again.  
›Cancel‹  
56  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
Additional example commands can be dis-  
played on the control display.  
Settings  
Setting the system language  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Personal Assistant"  
4. "Help"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Language"  
5. "Example commands"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Sample commands for the current context are  
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-  
sistant widget.  
Setting the response length  
You can set the Personal Assistant to use  
standard dialog or a short version. In case of  
the short version, the announcements by the  
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-  
breviated version.  
Additional information:  
Adjust widgets, refer to page 53.  
Menu items  
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu  
items directly. Say the menu items as they are  
displayed on the control display. You do not  
have to follow the order of the menu items  
when speaking them out loud.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
1. Activate the voice control system.  
2. ›Media‹  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Response length"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
3. ›Presets‹  
The stored stations are displayed on the  
control display.  
Speaking during voice output  
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the  
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-  
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-  
tionally, for instance due to background noise  
or conversations in the vehicle.  
Owner's Manual via voice operation  
You can ask simple questions about vehicle  
functions and the operation of the vehicle.  
The voice activation system and the feed-  
back it provides do not replace the printed  
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function  
is available depending on the national-market  
version. The speech recognition and quality of  
the feedback may vary.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
Example command: ›How can the passenger  
airbag be deactivated?‹  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Speaking during voice output"  
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.  
When stationary, the section of the integrated  
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control  
display.  
57  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Online speech processing"  
Suggestions  
General information  
The Personal Assistant provides helpful, indi-  
vidual suggestions.  
Configuring the visualization  
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can  
be set.  
Activating/deactivating suggestions  
1.  
Apps menu  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Visualization"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. "Receive suggestions"  
Voice control from third-party  
providers  
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party  
voice control can be enabled by pressing and  
holding the microphone button on the steering  
wheel.  
Adapting suggestions  
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by  
category or to output a signal tone.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
5. "Long press"  
Online speech processing  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Online speech processing improves the quality  
of the speech recognition and search results  
for points of interest. To use the functions,  
data is transmitted to a service provider via an  
encrypted connection and stored locally there.  
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required  
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is  
available depending on the national-market  
version. Online speech processing is not avail-  
able in all languages.  
Adjusting the volume  
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-  
ance until the desired volume is set.  
The volume remains constant even if the vol-  
ume of other audio sources is changed.  
Using the voice activation of the  
smartphone  
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-  
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice  
control.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Voice control"  
58  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
The device must be connected via Apple Car-  
Play or Android Auto.  
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-  
lems with the speech recognition feature.  
A poor data connection affects the re-  
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and  
search function.  
1. Press and hold the  
button on the  
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.  
The voice activation of the smartphone is  
activated.  
Connecting mobile devices  
to the vehicle  
If activation is successful, a confirmation  
appears on the control display.  
Principle  
2. Press and hold the  
button on the  
Various connection types are available for us-  
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-  
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-  
vice and the desired function.  
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the  
smartphone.  
Automating routines  
General information  
General information  
Detailed information on the functions and con-  
nection types can be found in the following  
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci-  
fied keyword:  
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,  
for instance the automatic opening of windows  
in the same place. Rules are created for this  
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-  
vated at any time.  
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.  
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,  
communication and entertainment.  
Activating/deactivating routines  
The following information sources can also be  
used:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.  
Driver’s Guide Web.  
3. "Automate habits"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
System limits  
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-  
tion about vehicle functions that may not be  
installed in the vehicle.  
Warning  
Operating the integrated information systems  
and communication devices while driving can  
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible  
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Only  
use the systems or devices when the traffic  
situation allows. As warranted, stop and use  
the systems and devices while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
This also applies to safety functions and  
systems.  
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may  
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-  
dows closed.  
Noises from the front passenger or occu-  
pants can impair the system. Avoid making  
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.  
59  
 
 
BMW iDrive  
CONTROLS  
them. The range of functions depends on the  
vehicle equipment and the mobile device.  
Overview  
The following overview shows possible func-  
tions and the suitable connection types for  
Function  
Connection type  
Icon on the con-  
trol display  
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.  
tem.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Using phone functions via iDrive.  
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.  
Playing music from a mobile device.  
Keyword: audio.  
Bluetooth audio.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.  
Calling without a mobile phone.  
Personal eSIM.  
Keyword: calling with the Personal  
eSIM.  
Keyword: Personal eSIM.  
Data exchange between mobile de-  
vice and vehicle.  
Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.  
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.  
hotspot.  
Keyword: personal hotspot.  
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and  
via voice control.  
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.  
voice control.  
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and  
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.  
Playing music from a USB device.  
Keyword: audio.  
USB.  
Keyword: USB connection.  
Additional information:  
USB port, refer to page 258.  
60  
 
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Functional requirements  
Additional information:  
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has  
been activated.  
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.  
BMW Remote Software  
Upgrade  
Consent to transmit the corresponding data  
was given in the Data Protection menu.  
Additional information:  
Principle  
Data protection, refer to page 65.  
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-  
date the entire software of the vehicle. This  
makes new functions, functional enhance-  
ments or quality improvements available.  
Search for an upgrade  
Functional requirement  
Standby must be turned on to search for a  
Remote Software Upgrade.  
General information  
BMW recommends performing the Remote  
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes  
available.  
Automatic search  
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in  
the background.  
Safety information  
Manual search  
Warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Search for upgrades"  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
61  
 
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
and after the installation has been successfully  
completed, the information about the version  
can be displayed on the control display.  
Download of an upgrade  
Automatic download  
If available, the data for a Remote Software  
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the  
vehicle. No download consent is required.  
This information is also available in the Con-  
nectedDrive customer portal.  
Displaying information  
Via My BMW App  
Display in the vehicle:  
If an upgrade is available, information on the  
new software version is displayed in the My  
BMW App.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
The data for the upgrade can then be down-  
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an  
existing WLAN connection.  
5.  
▷
Display currently installed version:  
"Installed version:"  
Data can then be sent from the mobile device  
to the vehicle.  
▷
Display new available version:  
"Info on version"  
This transmission method accelerates the  
download of the data, for instance in areas  
with limited mobile network availability.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW  
App on your smartphone.  
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:  
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.  
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via  
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.  
Installing the upgrade  
Data for the upgrade is sent from the mo-  
bile device to the vehicle both while driving  
and when stopped. Depending on the size  
of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive  
your vehicle to complete the data transfer.  
General information  
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-  
grade may result in the deletion of software  
changes, e.g., performance increases not  
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Modifications to the electrical system of the  
vehicle, for instance to control units, that  
have not been made by the vehicle manu-  
facturer can lead to an interruption of the  
installation.  
Additional information:  
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,  
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, Communication.  
▷
▷
▷
The installation does not occur until the  
consent was given.  
Information about the version  
The installation may take around 20 mi-  
nutes.  
General information  
The installation cannot be terminated.  
The information about the version contains a  
description of the updates included in the Re-  
mote Software Upgrade. During the download  
62  
 
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-  
stallation.  
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.  
Remove the devices connected to the diag-  
nostic socket.  
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-  
lation.  
Installing immediately  
The upgrade can be installed immediately if all  
prerequisites have been met.  
Prerequisites for the installation  
▷
Sufficiently charged battery.  
▷
The outside temperature is above  
14 ℉/-10 ℃.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. "Start upgrade now"  
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.  
The selector lever position P is engaged.  
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
The engine is turned off and sufficiently  
cooled down.  
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-  
requisites on the control display.  
Installing with timer  
When the trip is completed, a timer can be  
used to install the upgrade automatically at  
a configured time such as during the night.  
A later installation may make sense to meet  
functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently  
cooled down engine.  
Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites  
automatically. Follow the instructions on the  
control display.  
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-  
ciently charged battery, the upgrade will not be  
offered for installation.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,  
after longer trips.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "System settings"  
Preparing the vehicle  
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
The installation starts automatically when:  
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public  
road.  
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured  
so that a fault message can be sent to the  
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-  
stallation is terminated.  
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have  
been established correctly.  
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the  
time of installation.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.  
Close the glass sunroof.  
Close the trunk.  
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready  
state is turned on.  
Installing via the My BMW App  
Once all preparations are complete and all re-  
quirements are met, the upgrade installation  
can also be started using the My BMW App  
Remove energy consuming devices such as  
a mobile phone.  
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-  
cle for the consent for installation.  
63  
 
 
BMW Remote Software Upgrade  
CONTROLS  
when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade in-  
stallation can be started remotely.  
Validity of the Owner's Manual  
Follow instructions in the My BMW App.  
Production of the vehicle  
At the time of production at the plant, the  
printed Owner's Manual is the most current  
resource.  
Functional limitations  
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is  
temporarily unavailable, for instance:  
After a software update in the vehicle  
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.  
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-  
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-  
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-  
est information.  
Central locking system and, if necessary,  
Comfort Access.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking lights.  
Horn.  
Alarm system.  
Emergency call.  
Power windows.  
Glass sunroof.  
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.  
Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.  
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked  
from the outside using the integrated key.  
After successful upgrade  
The vehicle can be used again immediately.  
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time  
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-  
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.  
After an extended stationary period, charge  
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.  
Malfunction  
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-  
structions on the control display or in the My  
BMW App.  
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact  
an authorized service center or another quali-  
fied service center or repair shop.  
64  
 
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Personal settings  
This personal data can be permanently de-  
leted using iDrive.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the following  
data is deleted:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.  
Stored radio stations.  
Stored shortcuts.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Navigation, for instance stored destina-  
tions.  
Data protection  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.  
Data transfer  
Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.  
Office data, for instance voice memos.  
Login accounts.  
Principle  
The vehicle offers different services, whose  
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-  
ice provider.  
Digital key.  
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take  
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-  
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-  
Drive customer portal so that remote functions  
can no longer be used.  
General information  
The data transfer can be deactivated for some  
services. When the data transfer is deacti-  
vated, the respective service cannot be used.  
Functional requirements  
Settings  
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.  
The data transfer can be configured in different  
stages or individually for separate services.  
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.  
Deleting data  
1.  
Apps menu  
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted  
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-  
tings.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Additional information:  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 65.  
Deleting personal data in the vehicle  
Reset vehicle data  
Principle  
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-  
tory settings when the drive-ready state is  
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores  
personal data such as stored radio stations.  
65  
 
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
switched off. Data can only be deleted while  
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must  
be in the vehicle.  
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver  
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock  
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital  
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver  
profile. After unlocking, you can change the  
BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Reset vehicle data"  
5. "Reset vehicle data"  
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when  
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the  
guest profile.  
If the synchronization of settings has been en-  
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal  
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.  
Functional requirements  
The vehicle must be stationary to create,  
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.  
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and  
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only  
possible when the vehicle has cellular network  
reception.  
BMW ID/driver profiles  
Principle  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is  
the personal login for all relevant offers for the  
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the  
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle  
settings.  
Welcome window  
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window  
is shown on the control display. The type of  
the welcome depends on the following prereq-  
uisites:  
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal  
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.  
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW  
ID or driver profile:  
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-  
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If  
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it  
are applied to the vehicle.  
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a  
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.  
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not  
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-  
file:  
General information  
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW  
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered  
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to  
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver  
profile.  
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW  
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in  
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-  
thorized service center.  
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.  
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:  
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW  
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the  
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-  
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is  
used to log in.  
The welcome is personalized, the stored  
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the  
driver profile can be changed.  
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on  
or the control display is tapped outside of the  
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.  
The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three  
driver profiles.  
66  
 
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Adding the BMW ID  
My BMW app  
1.  
Tap the BMW ID icon or the personal  
image on the status bar.  
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle, the  
vehicle is automatically added to the My BMW  
App. This means that My BMW App functions  
can be used for this vehicle. To do so, the My  
BMW App must be used with the same BMW  
ID.  
2. "Add BMW ID"  
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your  
smartphone.  
4. Observe the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Alternatively, an authorized service center can  
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,  
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the  
control display in the corresponding vehicle.  
▷
If you have installed the My BMW App  
on your smartphone and saved your  
BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically  
transferred to the vehicle.  
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-  
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More  
information is shown on the control display.  
▷
If you do not have a BMW ID yet, you a  
new BMW ID can be registered.  
5. Select the other settings you want to  
change, e.g., to configure driver recognition  
as desired.  
Creating a driver profile  
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not  
available, driver profiles can be created.  
▷
To configure driver recognition, the cor-  
responding vehicle key or digital key  
must be detected in the vehicle.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Add driver profile"  
Driver recognition can be set or changed in  
the settings at a later time.  
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.  
4. Select the desired setting:  
"Transfer settings"  
6. Change any additional settings as neces-  
sary.  
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by  
an authorized service center and added to the  
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed  
on the control display in the corresponding ve-  
hicle.  
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-  
tings of the guest profile will be applied.  
Primary user  
The primary user is the person who first adds  
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the  
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the  
primary user can be defined by an authorized  
service center.  
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW  
App.  
Confirming a BMW ID  
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized  
service center and added to the vehicle, you  
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:  
The primary user has access to the following  
settings, for example:  
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.  
1. Select the BMW ID.  
Transferring the primary user role to an-  
other BMW ID.  
2. Scan the QR code shown.  
▷
▷
Change vehicle-wide data protection set-  
tings.  
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-  
phone.  
Create the main digital key.  
67  
 
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 84.  
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home  
address, or map settings.  
Automatic driver recognition  
If driver recognition has been established, au-  
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file is triggered by the following actions:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-  
tions.  
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-  
guage, or units.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button  
on the assigned vehicle key.  
Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-  
tivation word.  
▷
By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle.  
The assigned vehicle key or the assigned  
Digital Key must be carried with you.  
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling  
and home lights.  
Settings from the following areas are only  
synchronized when you log in for the first time:  
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching  
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the  
assigned Digital Key must be carried with  
you. Depending on the country, it may not  
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.  
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s  
seat position or temperature setting.  
▷
Data protection menu.  
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys  
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the  
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to  
the following priority:  
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile  
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be  
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select  
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome  
window.  
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers  
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or  
the assigned driver profile.  
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed  
at any time via iDrive:  
The guest profile is activated when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-  
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
▷
▷
If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are  
detected at the same time, the Digital  
Key triggers the activation of the assigned  
BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.  
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
If another key is detected on the driver's  
door after activating the BMW ID or the  
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-  
file of the last key detected is activated.  
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,  
the stored settings are loaded.  
Guest profile  
The guest profile can be activated and  
changed by anyone.  
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-  
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-  
vated.  
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-  
matically active:  
Setting synchronization  
If synchronization is switched on, settings from  
the following areas, for example, are continu-  
ously synchronized:  
68  
 
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a  
driver profile has not yet been created.  
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the  
BMW Cloud will be retained.  
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-  
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key  
that was used to unlock the vehicle.  
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-  
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from  
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-  
responding BMW IDs are removed from the  
vehicle.  
The following limitations apply to the guest  
profile:  
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is  
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and  
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.  
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,  
navigation functions or saving favorites.  
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.  
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the  
guest profile.  
Transfer of the vehicle key  
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or  
a driver profile can be used to view or change  
the stored personal settings.  
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign driver detection  
to the guest profile.  
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-  
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.  
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-  
sons, any assigned driver detection should be  
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can  
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the  
driver profile.  
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome  
screen or via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to  
transfer a digital key to permit other persons  
the use of your own vehicle.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"  
"Change driver profile"  
Additional information:  
3. "Continue as guest"  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 84.  
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile  
Settings  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
General information  
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-  
ating a driver profile can be changed.  
2.  
▷
▷
"Manage BMW IDs"  
"Change driver profile"  
3.  
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or  
the desired driver profile.  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes  
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW  
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized  
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the  
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is  
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-  
moved, the guest profile is activated.  
2. "Settings"  
The following settings are available for the  
BMW ID:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.  
The personal salutation.  
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App  
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the  
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with  
69  
 
 
Personal settings  
CONTROLS  
The following settings are available for the  
driver profile:  
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.  
The profile picture.  
The profile name.  
Selecting a profile picture  
The profile picture can be selected from the  
predefined profile pictures:  
1.  
Tap the icon or personal picture in the  
status bar.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "Manage profile picture"  
4. "Select profile picture"  
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can  
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW  
App. This requires that the synchronization  
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-  
tings. After transferring the profile picture from  
the My BMW App, you can only select one of  
the predefined images if the profile picture in  
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization  
is deactivated.  
System limits  
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or  
the digital key may not always be possible in  
the following cases, for example:  
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not  
locked and unlocked.  
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-  
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver  
profile are located in the outer area on the  
driver's side of the vehicle.  
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked via the My  
BMW App.  
The use of personal settings that are stored for  
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-  
cal limitations. For example, settings may be  
stored for a system that is not available, or  
available in a non-compatible version, in other  
vehicles.  
70  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Opening and closing  
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-  
picion that a battery or button cell battery has  
been swallowed or is located in any part of  
the body.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Vehicle key  
General information  
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of  
delivery, each containing an integrated key.  
Buttons on the vehicle key.  
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-  
tery.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings are possible  
for the button functions.  
Unlock.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-  
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.  
Lock.  
Stationary climate control, refer to  
page 252.  
To provide information on maintenance rec-  
ommendations, the service data is stored in  
the vehicle key.  
Open the cargo area.  
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle  
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting  
the vehicle.  
Panic mode.  
Pathway lighting, refer to page 156.  
Safety information  
Additional vehicle keys  
Additional vehicle keys are available from an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning  
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.  
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-  
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries  
within two hours, for example due to internal  
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key  
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-  
71  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a  
Loss of vehicle keys  
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
pointed object and lift it out.  
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID  
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle  
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can  
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-  
file.  
Replacing the battery  
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-  
tive side facing up.  
NOTICE  
5. Press the lid closed.  
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-  
vice can damage the device. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Always replace the  
discharged battery with a battery with the  
same voltage, the same size and the same  
specification.  
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key  
until the integrated key engages.  
Have old batteries disposed of by an  
authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop,  
or take them to a collection point.  
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle  
key.  
Integrated key  
2. Place the integrated key underneath the  
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and  
lift the lid with a lever movement of the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
General information  
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked man-  
ually using the integrated key.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-  
ment.  
Safety information  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
72  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
Use the thumb for counter support to pre-  
vent the cover cap from falling out of the  
door handle.  
Removing the integrated key  
3. Remove the cover cap.  
4. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the  
integrated key, arrow 2.  
Unlocking the vehicle manually  
1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle out-  
ward with one hand.  
5. Open the driver's door.  
6. Press the central locking button to unlock  
the other doors.  
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door  
opener of the other doors from the inside.  
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from  
the back under the cover cap and push the  
cover cap out.  
Locking the vehicle manually  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.  
73  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Emergency detection of the vehicle  
key  
Lock button for manual locking of the doors.  
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready  
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.  
Locking the vehicle  
Proceed as follows in this case:  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Enter the vehicle on the front passenger's  
side and close the front passenger door.  
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the  
mark on the steering column. Pay attention  
to the display in the instrument cluster.  
3. Press the central locking button to unlock  
all doors.  
2.  
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:  
If vehicle is de-energized: Press down the  
lock buttons on all doors except the front  
passenger door.  
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-  
onds.  
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:  
4. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger  
door.  
Slightly change the position of the vehi-  
cle key and repeat the procedure.  
5. Press down the lock button on the front  
passenger door and close the front pass-  
enger door.  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
6. Pull the door handles to make sure they are  
locked. If necessary, repeat the process.  
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
Alarm system  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-  
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.  
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.  
Fault of the radio link from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency  
detection to switch off the alarm.  
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal  
objects.  
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key  
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be  
activated.  
Do not transport the vehicle key together  
with metal objects.  
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones  
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-  
ity to the vehicle key.  
74  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-  
imity to other electronic devices.  
Warning  
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging  
process of mobile devices, for instance  
charging of a mobile phone.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity  
of the wireless charging tray.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Place the vehicle key in a different location.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also  
be unlocked and locked from the outside with  
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-  
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready  
state.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Access to vehicle interior  
Safety information  
Warning  
NOTICE  
The window will be lowered slightly when  
pulling on the door handle. In the event of  
frost, the window may be frozen solid and  
may not be able to be lowered. There is a risk  
of damage to property. When pulling on the  
door handle, make sure that the window is  
lowered. If necessary, remove snow and ice  
from the window. Do not open the door with  
force.  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
Actions during unlocking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-  
cle:  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap  
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle  
will be unlocked.  
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-  
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.  
The welcome light can be turned on when  
the vehicle is being unlocked.  
75  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
In addition, the following functions are exe-  
cuted:  
Settings, refer to page 88.  
With the vehicle key  
Unlocking the vehicle  
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned  
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver  
profile will be activated.  
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless  
they were manually switched off.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in  
exterior mirrors are folded out.  
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have  
been unlocked due to the settings in place,  
press the button on the vehicle key again to  
unlock the other vehicle access points.  
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using  
the button inside the vehicle, they will not  
fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.  
The lighting functions may depend on the am-  
bient brightness.  
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.  
The alarm system is switched off.  
Additional information:  
Locking the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 88.  
1. Close the driver's door.  
Welcome lights, refer to page 155.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 66.  
2.  
Press the button on the vehicle key.  
All vehicle access points are locked.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
Actions during locking  
Depending on the settings, the following func-  
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:  
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed  
with a light signal or a sound signal.  
The vehicle can be accessed without operating  
the vehicle key.  
▷
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-  
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically  
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers  
are switched on.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
The following functions are executed:  
▷
All doors, the trunk, and the fuel filler flap  
are locked.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This  
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-  
ing the lock buttons or the door openers.  
▷
▷
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be  
outside of the vehicle near the doors.  
▷
The alarm system is switched on.  
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when  
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk  
twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be  
turned off using the Start/Stop button.  
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must  
elapse before unlocking is possible.  
Additional information:  
76  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
When the driver walks away from the unlocked  
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be  
locked.  
Unlock vehicle  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-  
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking  
zone.  
The unlocking zone is located within a radius  
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear  
of the vehicle.  
Fully grasp the handle of a door.  
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key  
leaves the locking zone.  
Locking the vehicle  
1. Close the driver's door.  
The locking zone is located within a radius of  
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of  
the vehicle.  
2. With your finger, touch the grooved surface  
on a closed door handle for approx. 1 sec-  
ond without gripping the door handle.  
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking  
zone for an extended period of time without  
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-  
cally.  
If a passenger is detected in the front pass-  
enger seat during locking and the seat belt of  
the front passenger is engaged in the seat belt  
buckle during locking:  
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured  
against theft.  
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
Malfunction  
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-  
ing request detection on the door handles.  
Actions during unlocking  
If the settings specify that only the driver's  
door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked,  
note the following:  
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock  
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key  
or use the integrated key.  
The driver's door and fuel filler flap will only  
unlock when the driver is within the driver's  
door unlocking zone.  
Touchless unlocking/locking of the  
vehicle  
Settings, refer to page 88.  
Principle  
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle  
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.  
77  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
Unlocking: when entering the unlocking  
zone, the doors and cargo area must be  
closed.  
▷
▷
Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the  
doors and cargo area must be closed.  
Automatic unlocking and locking must be  
activated in the settings.  
Hold the activated Key Card directly at the cen-  
ter of the driver's door handle.  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.  
For contactless locking of the vehicle, no  
second vehicle key may be within a radius  
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.  
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,  
make sure that all doors and the trunk are  
closed.  
▷
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for  
several days, contactless unlocking/locking  
will only be available after the vehicle has  
been driven.  
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change  
the position of the Key Card and repeat the  
procedure.  
Additional information:  
With the BMW Digital Key  
Settings, refer to page 88.  
Principle  
With the Key Card  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, a digital key can be installed  
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-  
lock and lock the vehicle.  
Principle  
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-  
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used  
to unlock and lock the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 84.  
Additional information:  
Key Card, refer to page 82.  
Locking/unlocking the vehicle  
General information  
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.  
Hold the smartphone NFC antenna directly at  
the center of the driver's door handle. The po-  
78  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
sition of the near field communication antenna  
depends on the smartphone model.  
Warning  
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,  
make sure that all doors and the trunk are  
closed.  
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and  
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the travel  
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening  
and closing.  
Frequently Asked Questions  
What precautions can be taken to be able to  
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in  
the vehicle key?  
With the vehicle key  
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option  
to lock and unlock a vehicle.  
General information  
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,  
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.  
This requires an active BMW Connected-  
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-  
led on a smartphone.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the following settings can be  
changed:  
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via  
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.  
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle  
key also unlocks the doors.  
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is  
required.  
▷
Before unlocking the cargo area with the  
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.  
Access to the cargo area  
Functional requirements  
Selector lever position P must be engaged to  
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.  
General information  
It may not be possible to open the cargo area  
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.  
You must enable the setting for opening with  
the vehicle key.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Valet parking mode, refer to page 87.  
Settings, refer to page 88.  
Safety information  
Opening the trunk  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key for approx. 1 second.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is  
clear while opening and closing.  
On the trunk  
General information  
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be  
accessed without activating the vehicle key.  
The key is automatically detected near the ve-  
hicle.  
79  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
▷
Press the button on the trunk.  
Press the button on the trunk.  
Functional prerequisite  
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your  
pants pocket.  
▷
The vehicle is locked after closing  
the cargo area. To do so, the driv-  
er's door must be closed and the vehicle  
key must be outside of the vehicle near the  
cargo area.  
Opening the trunk  
Inside the vehicle  
Functional prerequisite  
The vehicle key or digital key must be located  
within the vehicle in order to close the trunk  
using the button inside the vehicle.  
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-  
ton on the trunk.  
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key  
with you and press the button on the trunk.  
Opening the trunk  
Press the button in the driver's door.  
Locked doors are not unlocked.  
Closing the cargo area manually  
Pull down the cargo area using the recessed  
grips.  
Closing the cargo area  
Depending on the equipment:  
Depending on the equipment: press  
the button on the cargo area.  
Pull and hold the button in the driver's  
door.  
The vehicle is locked after closing the  
cargo area. To do so, the driver's door must be  
closed and the vehicle key must be outside of  
the vehicle near the cargo area.  
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk is  
closed.  
Interruption of the opening  
procedure  
The opening procedure is interrupted in the  
following situations:  
Closing the cargo area automatically  
▷
▷
When the vehicle starts moving.  
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of the  
cargo area. Pressing it again closes the  
cargo area again.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
80  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Pressing the button again continues the  
opening process.  
The sensor has an approximate range of  
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.  
▷
By pressing or pulling the button in the  
driver's door. Pressing again continues the  
opening procedure.  
If contactless opening is used for the cargo  
area, the locked doors will not be unlocked.  
Safety information  
Interruption of the closing procedure  
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
Warning  
With hands-free opening of the trunk, there  
may be unintentional contact with vehicle  
parts, e.g., hot exhaust system. There is a  
risk of injury. When moving your foot, make  
sure you have a firm stance and do not touch  
the vehicle.  
▷
If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-  
ment.  
▷
By pressing the button on the outside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
▷
▷
▷
By pressing the button on the inside of  
the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the  
cargo area again.  
Functional requirements  
▷
To close the cargo area contactlessly, the  
automatic tailgate must be installed.  
By pressing the button on the vehicle key.  
Pressing it again opens the cargo area  
again.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position P must be engaged.  
Contactless opening and closing of the  
trunk must be activated in the settings.  
By releasing the button in the driver's door.  
Pulling again and holding continues the  
closing motion.  
Depending on vehicle equipment:  
No trailer hitches should be mounted.  
▷
Opening and closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
Additional information:  
Settings, refer to page 88.  
Principle  
Opening the cargo area  
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at  
approx. one arm's length away from the  
rear of the vehicle.  
You can open the cargo area contactlessly  
when carrying the vehicle key on your person.  
With automatic tailgate activation, the cargo  
area can also be closed contactlessly.  
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driv-  
ing direction and immediately pull it back.  
Sensors detect specific foot movements near  
the center of the trunk, and the trunk opens or  
closes.  
General information  
Function availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
If the vehicle key is within the sensor range, the  
cargo area may open or close inadvertently if  
you unintentionally move your foot or if a foot  
movement is detected.  
81  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
With these movements, the leg must pass  
through the ranges of both sensors.  
Trunk emergency unlocking  
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.  
The trunk is unlocked.  
Before the cargo area opens, the hazard warn-  
ing system flashes.  
Moving a foot again will stop the opening proc-  
cedure. The subsequent foot movement will  
close the cargo area again.  
Malfunction  
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-  
ate the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow  
and smooth motion.  
Closing the cargo area  
To close it completely, push the trunk lid down  
lightly. Closing occurs automatically.  
Perform the foot movement for opening the  
cargo area.  
The hazard warning system flashes and an  
acoustic signal sounds.  
Key Card  
Moving a foot again will stop the closing proc-  
ess. The subsequent foot movement will open  
the cargo area again.  
Principle  
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked  
and locked, as well as started.  
System limits  
The detection of the foot movement may be  
limited due to the following external conditions:  
General information  
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market version.  
▷
▷
Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.  
Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.  
A digital key that has already been paired with  
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The  
digital key must be activated via iDrive.  
Movement in range of the sensors may cause  
the trunk to open unintentionally, e.g., due  
to running water when cleaning the vehicle  
or from heavy rainfall, or due to the moving  
brushes in a car wash. To prevent such un-  
intended opening of the cargo area in such  
cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient dis-  
tance from the rear of the vehicle.  
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key  
Card or take the Key Card with you because  
the active Key Card can be used to start the  
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to  
a service appointment.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Objects  
mounted on a trailer hitch cannot be detected  
if the trailer power socket is not plugged in.  
82  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Deactivating Key Card  
Safety information  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
NOTICE  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the  
wireless charging tray at the same time, the  
Key Card could become damaged. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Do not place the  
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the  
same time as a mobile device.  
5. "Key Card"  
6. "Deactivate Key Card"  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Activating/deactivating Key Card in  
the vehicle  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with  
the activated Key Card.  
General information  
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the  
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the  
vehicle key.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 75.  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of  
paired digital keys.  
Functional requirement  
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to  
activate and deactivate the Key Card.  
Activating Key Card  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of  
the smartphone tray.  
3. Press the Start/Stop button.  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key  
Card can be removed from the tray.  
Malfunction  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key  
Card if there are objects between the smart-  
phone tray and the Key Card, e.g., a wallet or  
smartphone case.  
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-  
phone tray.  
3. Follow instructions on the control display.  
83  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirements  
BMW Digital Key  
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW  
Digital Key  
Principle  
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-  
Drive account of the vehicle owner.  
BMW Digital Key lets you lock and unlock and  
start your vehicle using a compatible smart-  
phone.  
The rechargeable battery of the smart-  
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-  
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable  
battery depends on the smartphone.  
General information  
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality  
depend on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version.  
▷
Bluetooth must be activated on the smart-  
phone for contactless unlocking and locking  
using the Digital Key.  
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-  
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile  
devices.  
Enabling the main digital key  
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a  
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle  
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-  
hicle for this purpose.  
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible  
smartphone, this function must be offered by  
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW  
app can be used to check if the smartphone  
and vehicle are compatible and which func-  
tions are supported.  
Proof of authorization can be started via the  
My BMW App or using the activation code in  
the corresponding smartphone function, e.g.,  
the Wallet app.  
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual  
settings can be assigned to a digital key.  
Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehi-  
cle to be enabled.  
When using a smartphone as a Digital Key,  
always carry a vehicle key or the activated Key  
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-  
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-  
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key  
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to  
be handed over to another person. You can  
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card  
instead of your smartphone.  
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital  
Key menu, on the app, or on the control dis-  
play.  
Sharing digital keys  
General information  
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-  
ice appointment.  
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys  
with other people. This option is available via  
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital  
key. This function must be supported by the  
smartphone.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 66.  
Key Card, refer to page 82.  
 
Forwarding authorization  
To share the digital key, select the correspond-  
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in  
the Wallet app.  
As soon as a digital key is shared with another  
person, the person will receive an invitation.  
84  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key  
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.  
If the smartphone associated with a shared  
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it  
will be deleted immediately.  
Limiting the range of functions  
Deletion via iDrive  
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-  
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the  
Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the  
switch-off for driving stability control systems  
can be disabled and the engine power can  
be reduced. For more information, refer to the  
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app.  
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be  
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the  
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone  
tray.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Authentication  
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone  
model, an authentication may be required for  
security and safety reasons.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
5. If necessary, select the digital key.  
6. Delete the Digital Key.  
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key  
or another method may be used for authenti-  
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions  
on the smartphone or the control display.  
Resetting the function  
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-  
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-  
hicle.  
Deleting digital keys  
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,  
all digital keys including the main digital key  
will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is  
retained and deactivated.  
General information  
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the  
list of enabled digital keys.  
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be  
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.  
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.  
The main digital key must be enabled again to  
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.  
Deleting the main digital key  
The main digital key can be deleted from the  
smartphone or via iDrive.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The deletion of the main digital key is com-  
pleted immediately.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Digital Key"  
Deleting a shared key  
5. "Reset function"  
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-  
phone with the master Digital Key, using the  
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,  
or via iDrive.  
Unlocking and locking the vehicle  
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using  
the door handle.  
The deletion via the smartphone using the  
main digital key will not be performed until the  
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to  
be deleted.  
Additional information:  
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 75.  
85  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Turning on the drive-ready state  
System limits  
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-  
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off  
with a digital key.  
Using the smartphone tray  
Additional information:  
Alarm system, refer to page 89.  
Malfunction  
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-  
function under the following circumstances:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-  
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover  
that is not suitable.  
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.  
2. Place smartphone in the center of the  
smartphone tray.  
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card  
are located between the smartphone and  
the smartphone cover.  
Ensure that the display is facing up.  
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.  
Fault of the connection from transmission  
towers or other equipment with high trans-  
mitting power.  
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on  
drive-ready state.  
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-  
ings or metal objects.  
Sale of the smartphone  
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior  
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that  
the smartphone can no longer be used for the  
vehicle.  
Buttons for the central  
locking system  
Changing smartphones  
General information  
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-  
ing off.  
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital  
Key, activate the new smartphone according to  
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The  
previous master key is deleted when the new  
smartphone is activated.  
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle  
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning  
system and interior lights are illuminated.  
Sale of the vehicle  
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital  
Key function or remove the vehicle from the  
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle  
owner.  
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-  
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-  
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key  
is retained and deactivated.  
86  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Valet parking mode  
Principle  
In the valet parking mode, the control display is  
disabled.  
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle  
is handed over for valet parking.  
General information  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
valet parking mode may not be available.  
The central locking buttons are located on the  
front door.  
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-  
tions:  
Locking the vehicle  
▷
Vehicle settings cannot be changed via  
iDrive.  
Press the button in the driver's door  
or front passengers door with the front  
doors closed.  
▷
Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-  
file cannot be changed.  
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.  
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.  
The vehicle is not secured against theft when  
locking.  
The audio system is muted, with the possi-  
ble volume of the audio system being lim-  
ited.  
Unlocking the vehicle  
▷
▷
▷
The integrated Universal Remote Control is  
deactivated.  
Press the button in the driver's door or  
front passenger’s door.  
Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned  
off.  
The availability of certain settings of the  
driving modes is limited.  
Opening the door  
▷
Press the button to unlock all the  
doors.  
Additional information:  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 66.  
Pull the door opener above the arm-  
rest.  
Functional requirement  
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a  
BMW ID.  
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door opener on the  
door to open the door. The other doors re-  
main locked.  
Back doors: pull twice on the door opener  
on the door to be opened; the first time  
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.  
The other doors remain locked.  
Activating the valet parking mode  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Valet parking mode"  
5. "Lock tailgate"  
87  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The cargo area is locked and disconnected  
from the central locking system.  
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler  
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-  
locks the entire vehicle.  
6. If necessary, "PIN"  
▷
"All doors"  
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-  
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The  
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-  
ing mode.  
The entire vehicle is unlocked.  
Touchless unlocking/locking  
7. If necessary, enter the PIN.  
8. "Activate valet parking mode"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Comfort access"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Deactivating valet parking mode  
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock  
screen.  
2.  
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.  
Automatic unlocking  
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the  
access data for the BMW ID.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have  
an assigned PIN: enter the access data  
for the BMW ID.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"  
"Unlock doors when in P"  
Settings  
If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically  
when drive-ready state is turned off or selector  
lever position P is engaged.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, various settings for opening  
and closing are possible.  
Automatic locking  
1.  
Apps menu  
Unlocking and locking  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Doors  
1.  
Apps menu  
5. "Lock after a short time"  
2. "Vehicle"  
The vehicle locks automatically after a short  
period of time if no door is opened after un-  
locking.  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
5. "Unlock"  
6. Select the desired setting:  
Confirmation signals from the vehicle  
▷
"Driver's door only"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
88  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-  
cle key is disabled.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Flash on lock/unlock"  
Opening/closing the cargo area  
contactlessly  
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,  
locking by flashing once.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
With alarm system:  
2. "Vehicle"  
"Sound on lock/unlock"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound  
signals, locking is confirmed with one  
sound signal.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Folding mirrors in automatically  
Alarm system  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Principle  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Lock/unlock"  
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic  
signal when someone attempts to open the  
locked vehicle incorrectly.  
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"  
Cargo area  
General information  
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm  
system reacts to the following changes:  
Cargo area and doors  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo  
area.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Doors and windows"  
4. "Tailgate"  
▷
▷
Movements in the vehicle interior.  
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as  
during attempts at stealing a wheel or  
when towing the vehicle.  
5. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Tailgate"  
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.  
Depending on the equipment, the cargo  
area will be unlocked or opened.  
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-  
board diagnostics.  
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"  
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-  
nected to the diagnostic socket.  
Depending on the equipment, the trunk  
will be unlocked or opened and the  
doors are unlocked.  
The alarm system signals these changes visu-  
ally and acoustically:  
▷
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is  
already unlocked"  
▷
Acoustic alarm:  
Depending on local regulations, the acous-  
tic alarm may be suppressed.  
The vehicle must be unlocked before  
the cargo area can be operated with the  
vehicle key.  
▷
Optical alarm:  
"Lock tailgate button"  
By flashing of the hazard warning system  
and headlights, where required.  
89  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Do not modify the system to ensure function of  
the alarm system.  
Indicator light on the interior mirror  
Turning the alarm system on/off  
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the  
vehicle is locked from the outside.  
The alarm system is not switched on if the  
vehicle is locked from a greater distance with  
the My BMW App or manually from the inside.  
The alarm system is switched off as soon as  
the vehicle is unlocked.  
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
Opening the doors with the alarm  
system switched on  
The alarm system is triggered when a door  
is opened if the door was unlocked using the  
integrated key in the door lock.  
The alarm system is switched on.  
The indicator light flashes for approx.  
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every  
2 seconds:  
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor  
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate  
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed  
access points are secured.  
Opening the cargo area with the  
alarm system switched on  
When the remaining open access points  
are closed, the interior motion sensor and  
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.  
The cargo area can be opened even when the  
alarm system is switched on.  
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will  
be locked and monitored again. The hazard  
warning system flashes once during closing.  
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all  
access points have been closed:  
Alarm system error.  
Panic mode  
You can trigger the alarm system if you find  
yourself in a dangerous situation.  
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:  
The vehicle has not been tampered with.  
The indicator light flashes after unlocking  
until drive-ready state is switched on, but  
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
and hold for at least 3 seconds.  
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-  
cle key three times in succession.  
The alarm has been triggered.  
Tilt alarm sensor  
To switch off the alarm: press any button.  
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.  
The alarm system responds in situations such  
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-  
cle is towed.  
Interior motion sensor  
The vehicle interior is monitored.  
90  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
The alarm system triggers when movement is  
detected inside the vehicle.  
Window  
The windows and the glass sunroof must be  
closed for the system to function properly.  
General information  
When a window is frequently opened to the  
same position, this task can be performed by  
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is  
useful if you frequently use the same parking  
garage, for example.  
Avoiding unintentional alarms  
General information  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-  
thorized action occurred.  
Additional information:  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 54.  
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:  
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.  
Safety information  
In duplex garages.  
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,  
at sea or on a trailer.  
Warning  
When operating the windows, body parts and  
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-  
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure  
that the travel path of the windows is clear  
while opening and closing.  
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.  
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-  
fueling.  
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion  
sensor can be switched off in such situations.  
With the vehicle key  
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  
interior motion sensor  
Opening windows  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
within 30 seconds as soon as the vehi-  
cle is locked.  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
The indicator light illuminates for approx.  
2 seconds and then continues to flash.  
The windows open for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-  
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  
again.  
Closing the windows  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key after lock-  
ing.  
Ending the alarm  
Unlock the vehicle.  
The windows close for as long as the button  
on the vehicle key is pressed.  
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated  
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently  
be turned on via the emergency detection of  
the vehicle key.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
91  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
On the door handle  
Inside the vehicle  
Principle  
Overview  
The windows can be closed using the door  
handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
General information  
The function is available with Comfort Access.  
Functional prerequisite  
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in  
your pants pocket.  
Power windows  
Closing the windows  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key or digital key must be inside  
the vehicle.  
Opening windows  
▷
Press the switch to the resistance  
point.  
With your finger, touch the grooved surface  
on a closed door handle without grasping the  
door handle.  
The window opens while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
In addition to locking, the windows and glass  
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.  
The window opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
Closing the windows  
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance  
point.  
The window closes while the switch  
is being held.  
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-  
ance point.  
The window closes automatically.  
Pulling again stops the motion.  
92  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Glass sunroof  
Principle  
Safety information  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts becoming jammed between the  
door frame and window while a window is be-  
ing closed.  
Warning  
Body parts can be jammed when operating  
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the area of movement of the  
glass sunroof is clear during opening and  
closing.  
General information  
If resistance or blockage is detected while a  
window is being closed, the closing will be in-  
terrupted.  
With the vehicle key  
Safety information  
Opening glass sunroof  
Warning  
Press and hold the button on the vehi-  
cle key after unlocking.  
Accessories on the windows such as anten-  
nas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There  
is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in  
the area of movement of the windows.  
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be  
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle  
key is pressed.  
Closing without the anti-trap  
mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
Closing glass sunroof  
With Comfort Access: press and hold  
the button on the vehicle key in close  
range of the vehicle after locking.  
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be  
closed for as long as the button on the vehicle  
key is pressed.  
1. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point and hold it there.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
The window closes with limited anti-trap  
mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a  
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.  
2. Pull the  
switch past the resistance  
point again within approx. 4 seconds and  
hold it there.  
On the door handle  
Principle  
The window closes without the anti-trap  
mechanism.  
The glass sunroof can be closed using the  
door handle without operating the vehicle key.  
The vehicle key is automatically detected near  
the vehicle.  
93  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Functional prerequisite  
Overview  
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in  
your pants pocket.  
Button in the vehicle  
Closing glass sunroof  
Opening/closing the glass sun-  
roof/sun protection.  
Touch the grooved surface on the external  
door handle of a closed door with your finger  
and hold it there without grasping the door  
handle.  
Lifting/closing glass sunroof  
In addition to locking, the windows and glass  
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.  
Push switch briefly upward.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior  
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded  
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not  
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are  
switched on.  
▷
The closed glass sunroof tilts  
and the sun protection opens  
slightly.  
▷
The opened glass sunroof  
closes until it is in the tilted  
position. The sun protection  
does not move.  
Inside the vehicle  
▷
The tilted glass sunroof closes.  
Functional requirements  
The glass sunroof and sun protection can be  
operated under the following conditions.  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection separately  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
▷
Slide switch back to the re-  
sistance point and hold.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.  
Holding down the switch  
opens the sun protection. If  
the sun protection is already  
fully open, the glass sunroof  
opens.  
General information  
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are  
operated using the same switch.  
▷
Slide switch forward to the resistance point  
and hold.  
The glass sunroof closes while the switch  
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already  
94  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-  
tection closes.  
Anti-trap mechanism  
▷
▷
Slide the switch back past the resistance  
point.  
Principle  
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or  
body parts from becoming jammed between  
the roof frame and glass sunroof while the  
glass sunroof is closing.  
The sun protection opens automatically. If  
the sun protection is already fully open, the  
glass sunroof opens automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
General information  
Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point.  
If a resistance or blockage is detected while  
the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-  
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the  
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-  
ing from the tilted position.  
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If  
the glass sunroof is already closed or in  
the tilted position, the sun protection closes  
automatically.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
Closing from the open position without  
the anti-trap mechanism  
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal  
closure, proceed as follows:  
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and  
sun protection together  
▷
Briefly press out the switch  
twice in succession toward  
the rear past the resistance  
point.  
The glass sunroof and sun  
protection open together.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-  
ing vehicle.  
Pressing the switch again  
stops the motion.  
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
▷
Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-  
sion toward the front past the resistance  
point.  
The glass sunroof closes with limited anti-  
trap mechanism. If the closing force ex-  
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is inter-  
rupted.  
The glass sunroof and sun protection close  
together.  
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.  
4. Push the switch forward again past the  
resistance point and hold until the glass  
sunroof closes without the anti-trap mech-  
anism. Make sure that the closing path is  
clear.  
Comfort position  
In some models, the wind noises in the car's  
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is  
not fully open. In these models, the automatic  
function initially only opens the glass sunroof  
up to this comfort position.  
Operating the switch inside the vehicle again  
opens the glass sunroof completely.  
95  
 
 
Opening and closing  
CONTROLS  
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.  
Closing from the lifted position without  
the anti-trap mechanism  
In case of danger from the outside or if icing  
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
▷
▷
▷
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then  
closes again.  
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,  
then opens and closes again.  
The sun protection is initialized in the  
closed position.  
Initialization is complete once the glass sun-  
roof and the sun protection have opened then  
closed again.  
1. Close all doors.  
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-  
ing vehicle.  
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance  
point and hold.  
Initializing after a power interruption  
General information  
After a power interruption during the opening  
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only  
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the  
system can help in this case.  
The system can be initialized under the follow-  
ing conditions:  
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-  
tion.  
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-  
alization is completed.  
▷
▷
The drive-ready state is established.  
The outside temperature is above  
41 ℉/5 ℃.  
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes  
without the anti-trap mechanism.  
Make sure that the closing path is clear.  
Initializing the system  
Press the switch up and hold  
it until the initialization is com-  
plete:  
96  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,  
the protective effect of the seat belt can no  
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding  
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat  
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest  
so that it is in the most upright position as  
possible and do not adjust again while driv-  
ing.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Sitting safely  
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of  
the occupants can make a vital contribution to  
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
In the event of an accident, the correct seat  
position plays an important role. Follow the in-  
formation in the following chapters.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 97.  
Manually adjustable seats  
Seat belts, refer to page 102.  
Head restraints, refer to page 104.  
Airbags, refer to page 163.  
Overview  
Seats  
Safety information  
Warning  
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-  
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-  
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Only adjust the  
seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is  
stationary.  
The levers for setting the seats are located on  
the front seats.  
97  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Adjusting the height  
Warning  
If a seat is not locked, it may move unexpect-  
edly while driving. Vehicle control could be  
lost. There is a risk of accident, injury, or  
property damage. After adjusting, move the  
seat forward or back slightly, making sure the  
seat engages properly.  
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as  
needed until the seat has reached the desired  
height.  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired  
direction.  
Adjusting seat tilt  
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the  
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.  
Electrically adjustable seats  
General information  
The current seat position can be stored using  
the memory function.  
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as  
needed until the seat has reached the desired  
inclination.  
98  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Adjusting seat tilt  
The switches for setting the seats are located  
on the front seats.  
Tilt switch up or down.  
Adjusting backrest tilt  
Setting the longitudinal direction  
Tilt switch forward or backward.  
Press switch forward or backward.  
Adjusting the seat position  
automatically  
Adjusting the height  
General information  
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored  
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver  
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is  
reactivated at a later time, the saved position  
will be called up automatically.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press switch up or down.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Seat comfort"  
4. Select driver’s seat.  
5. "Use automatically"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
99  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Thigh support  
Backrest width  
Sport seat  
Principle  
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side  
support when cornering.  
General information  
The backrest width is changed by adjusting  
the side sections of the backrest.  
Adjusting the backrest width  
▷
Press the front section of the but-  
ton:  
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push  
the thigh support forward or back.  
The backrest width decreases.  
▷
Press the rear section of the button:  
The backrest width increases.  
Lumbar support  
Principle  
Functional limitation  
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest  
width at very high and very low temperatures.  
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-  
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar  
region of the spine. The lower back and the  
spine are supported for upright sitting position.  
Entering the rear  
Adjusting the lumbar support  
Safety information  
▷
Press the front/rear section of the  
button:  
The curvature is increased/de-  
creased.  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
▷
Press the upper/lower section of the but-  
ton:  
The curvature is shifted up/down.  
Functional limitation  
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar  
support at very high and very low tempera-  
tures.  
Warning  
Unexpected movements of the rear seat  
backrest while driving may occur if the rear  
seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control  
could be lost. There is a risk of accident, in-  
jury, or property damage. Fold back and lock  
the backrests before driving. Make sure the  
100  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
backrest engages correctly by slightly moving  
forward and back.  
The process will be terminated when the  
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-  
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.  
Manual longitudinal setting  
Push the seat backrest rearward  
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.  
Fold the seat backrest forward  
The seat moves automatically to the last seat  
position that was stored.  
1. Pull lever up to the stop.  
Calibrating the front seats  
General information  
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer  
functions precisely, a Check Control message  
is displayed on the control display.  
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-  
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.  
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.  
3. Push the seat forward.  
Safety information  
Push the seat backrest rearward  
Warning  
1. Push the seat back into the initial position.  
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Electric longitudinal setting  
Fold the seat backrest forward  
1. Pull lever up to the stop.  
Calibrating the front seat  
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-  
ward until the seat stops.  
2. Press the switch forward again until the  
seat stops.  
As soon as the message on the control dis-  
play disappears, the calibration is complete.  
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-  
bration.  
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.  
If the message is still shown after repeated  
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat  
will automatically move to the most forward  
position.  
101  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat belts  
Warning  
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,  
General information  
The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to en-  
sure occupant safety. However, they can only  
offer protection when adjusted correctly.  
the protective effect of the middle seat belt  
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or  
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat  
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.  
Always make sure that seat belts are being  
worn by the occupants before driving off. The  
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-  
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-  
place seat belts.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail  
in the following situations:  
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to  
achieve the best possible protective effect for  
the seat belts when used properly and with the  
correct seat settings.  
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are  
damaged, soiled, or changed in any  
other way.  
Additional information:  
▷
Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders  
were modified.  
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 97.  
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in  
the event of an accident. There is a risk of  
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do  
not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat  
belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat  
belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat  
belts checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one  
person will potentially defeat the ability of  
the seat belt to serve its protective function.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Do not strap in more than one person per  
single seat belt. Infants and children are not  
allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be  
transported and secured in designated child  
restraint systems.  
Correct use of seat belts  
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over  
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.  
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over  
your lap. The seat belt must not press on  
your stomach.  
Warning  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all  
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.  
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp  
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard  
or fragile objects.  
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.  
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward  
around your upper body area.  
102  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Anti-trap mechanism  
Seat belt extender  
Principle  
Warning  
The seat belt extender makes it easier to put  
on the seat belt.  
When extending and retracting the seat belt  
extender, body parts and objects can be jam-  
med. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Make sure that the area of  
movement of the seat belt extender is clear.  
General information  
If the belt carrier encounters resistance when  
extending or retracting, the seat belt extender  
moves back somewhat in the respective op-  
posite. Following an attempt, the seat belt ex-  
tender will stop in this position.  
To reactivate the seat belt extender, eliminate  
the resistance and open and close the respec-  
tive door.  
The seat belt extender extends automatically  
and keeps the seat belt ready to put on, arrow.  
After the belt is put on, it goes back into the  
resting position.  
Buckling the seat belt  
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder  
and hip to put it on.  
If the seat belt has not yet been applied, the  
seat belt extender goes back under the follow-  
ing circumstances:  
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt  
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage  
audibly.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Waiting period of approx. five minutes.  
Opening the respective door.  
After a short distance travelled.  
Locking the vehicle from the outside.  
When the respective door is closed, the seat  
belt extender extends again.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Door is closed.  
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an  
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help  
position the buckle when not in use.  
▷
Vehicle key detected in the car's interior.  
Unbuckling the seat belt  
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.  
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.  
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt  
winder.  
103  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Seat belt reminder  
If a door with access to the rear row seating  
is operated within 30 minutes before starting  
off, a message appears on the control display  
when the trip is completed and a signal tone  
sounds.  
General information  
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned  
correctly.  
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the  
following situations:  
If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the  
message is displayed again after the trip has  
been completed.  
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or  
on the passenger's side is not fastened.  
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-  
ing.  
Activate/deactivate the function  
1.  
Apps menu  
When objects are lying on a seat.  
2. "System settings"  
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-  
minates after turning on the drive-ready state  
when the seat belt reminder is active.  
Safety mode  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has  
been fastened correctly.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver  
and front passenger seat belt straps are auto-  
matically tightened once after driving off, if the  
seat belt is fastened.  
Icon  
Meaning  
If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g.,  
during emergency braking, the front seat belts  
are automatically pretensioned.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is  
not buckled.  
After a critical driving situation without an acci-  
dent, the front seat belts are loosened again. If  
the belt tension does not loosen automatically,  
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt us-  
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the  
seat belt before continuing to drive.  
Seat belt on the passenger  
seat or another seat in the ve-  
hicle is not buckled.  
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-  
responding seat.  
Seat belt is not buckled on the  
corresponding seat.  
Front head restraints  
Safety information  
Warning  
Rear Occupant Alert  
Principle  
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-  
straints can cause injuries in the head and  
neck area. There is a risk of injury.  
At the end of a trip, the system informs the  
driver of the possible presence of occupants on  
the rear seats.  
104  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Before driving, install the removed head  
restraints on the occupied seats.  
Adjusting the height  
Adjust the head restraint so its center  
supports the back of the head at as  
close to eye level as possible.  
▷
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-  
straint is as close as possible to the back  
of the head. Adjust the distance via the  
backrest tilt as needed.  
For manually adjustable head restraints:  
After adjusting, make sure that the head  
restraint is correctly engaged.  
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and  
push the head restraint down.  
To raise: push the head restraint up.  
Warning  
Adjusting the height: M Sport seat  
Body parts can be jammed when moving the  
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make  
sure that the area of movement is clear when  
moving the head restraint.  
Warning  
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-  
tective effect in the head and neck area.  
There is a risk of injury.  
Press switch up or down.  
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.  
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes  
hangers, directly on the head restraint.  
Adjusting the distance  
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-  
termined to be safe for attachment to a  
head restraint.  
Do not use any accessories, for instance  
pillows, while driving.  
▷
▷
Back: press the button and push the head  
restraint toward the rear.  
Forward: pull the head restraint toward the  
front.  
105  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be  
stored using the memory function.  
Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat  
The distance to the back of the head is ad-  
justed via the backrest inclination.  
Safety information  
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint  
is as close as possible to the back of the head.  
Warning  
Removing the head restraints  
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  
sitting in the seat in question.  
Objects in the mirror are closer than they ap-  
pear. The distance to the road users behind  
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance  
while changing lanes. There is a risk of ac-  
cident, injury, or property damage. Estimate  
the distance to the traffic behind by looking  
over your shoulder.  
Overview  
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-  
sistance.  
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head  
restraint out completely.  
Removing the head restraints: M  
Sport seat  
The head restraints cannot be removed.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.  
Installing head restraints  
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head  
restraint.  
Adjust the exterior mirrors.  
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb  
Monitor.  
Exterior mirrors  
General information  
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is  
more curved than the driver's side mirror.  
Adjusting the exterior mirrors  
Press the button.  
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the  
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If  
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated  
at a later time, the stored position is called up  
automatically.  
The selected exterior mirror moves  
along with the button movement.  
106  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Selecting the exterior mirror  
Automatic Curb Monitor  
To change over to the other mirror:  
Slide the switch.  
Principle  
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on  
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This  
improves your view of the curb and other low-  
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.  
Malfunction  
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the  
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the  
mirror glass.  
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor  
Folding in/folding out the exterior  
mirrors  
1.  
Slide the switch to the driver's side  
mirror position.  
2. Engage selector lever position R.  
NOTICE  
Deactivating the Automatic Curb  
Monitor  
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side  
exterior mirror position.  
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle  
can be damaged in car washes. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Before washing,  
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.  
Press the button.  
Interior mirror, manually  
dimmable  
Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to  
approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.  
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-  
ful in the following situations:  
▷
▷
In car washes.  
On narrow roads.  
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded  
out automatically at a speed of approx.  
25 mph/40 km/h.  
To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mir-  
ror, flip the lever forward.  
Automatic heating  
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  
as needed and when the drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
Interior mirror, automatic  
dimming feature  
Automatic dimming  
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-  
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior  
mirror are used to control this.  
General information  
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.  
Photocells are used for control:  
107  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.  
1. Fold the lever down completely.  
On the rear of the mirror.  
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands  
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-  
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-  
tion.  
Overview  
3. Fold the lever back up.  
Memory function  
Principle  
The following settings can be stored and, if  
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-  
tion:  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.  
▷
Keep the photocells clean.  
Exterior mirror adjustment.  
Height of the Head-up display.  
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior  
mirror and the windshield.  
General information  
Two memory locations with different settings  
can be set for each driver profile.  
Steering wheel  
Safety information  
Warning  
The following settings are not stored:  
▷
▷
Backrest width.  
Lumbar support.  
Steering wheel adjustments while driving  
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-  
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is  
a risk of accident, injury, or property damage.  
Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
stationary only.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Using the memory function while driving can  
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel  
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only retrieve the memory function  
when the vehicle is stationary.  
Manual steering wheel adjustment  
108  
 
 
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel  
CONTROLS  
Seat climate control  
Warning  
There is a danger of jamming when moving  
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any  
adjustment.  
Various climate control functions are available  
for the seats.  
Additional information:  
Climate control, refer to page 242.  
Overview  
The memory buttons are located on the front  
doors.  
Storing settings  
1. Set the desired position.  
2.  
Press the button. The LED illumi-  
nates.  
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2  
while the LED is illuminated. A signal  
sounds.  
Calling up settings  
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.  
The stored position is called up.  
The procedure stops when a seat setting  
switch or one of the memory buttons is  
pressed again.  
The adjustment of the seat position on the  
driver's side is interrupted after a short time  
while driving.  
109  
 
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Transporting children safely  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child  
restraint systems and their components to  
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn  
injuries when touching the hot components.  
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose  
the child restraint system to direct sunlight  
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let  
the child restraint system cool down before  
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-  
attended in the vehicle.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
The right place for children  
Safety information  
Warning  
Children in the rear seat  
General information  
Accident research shows that the safest place  
for children is in the rear seat.  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Children younger than 13 years of age or  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported  
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-  
tems designed for the age, weight and size  
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older  
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable  
child restraint system can no longer be used  
due to their age, weight, or size.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly  
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without  
suitable additional child restraint systems.  
The protective effect of safety gear, including  
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly  
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-  
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life. Secure children  
Warning  
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,  
especially children, or animals. There is a  
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave  
people, especially children, or animals unat-  
tended in the vehicle.  
110  
 
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child  
restraint systems.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Children on the front passenger  
seat  
The protective effect of child restraint sys-  
tems and their fastening systems which have  
been damaged or exposed to an accident  
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-  
erly restrained in the event of an accident,  
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk  
of injury or danger to life.  
General information  
Before using a child restraint system on the  
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,  
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
Do not use child restraint systems which  
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-  
dent.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 165.  
If attachment systems have been damaged  
or strained by an accident, have them  
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-  
ice center or another qualified service center  
or repair shop.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
Installing child restraint  
systems  
General information  
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-  
erating and safety information of the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using child restraint systems.  
On the front passenger seat  
Deactivating the airbags  
Warning  
Active front passenger airbags can injure a  
child in a child restraint system when the air-  
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.  
Make sure that the front passenger airbags  
111  
 
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER  
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.  
Child seat security  
Before installing a child restraint system in the  
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,  
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side  
are deactivated.  
Additional information:  
For automatic deactivation of front passenger  
airbags, refer to page 165.  
The seat belts in the rear and the front pass-  
enger seat belt can be permanently locked to  
fasten child restraint systems.  
Seat position and height  
After installing a child restraint system, move  
the front passenger seat as far back as it will  
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest  
position. This seat position and height ensure  
the best possible position for the belt and of-  
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-  
dent.  
Locking the seat belt  
1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.  
2. Secure the child restraint system with the  
seat belt.  
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-  
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that  
the belt is not constrained.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
and pull it tight against the child restraint  
system. The seat belt is disabled.  
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt  
is located in front of the seat belt guide of the  
child seat, move the front passenger seat care-  
fully forward until the best possible seat belt  
guide position is reached.  
Unlocking the seat belt  
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.  
2. Remove the child restraint system.  
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in  
completely.  
Backrest width  
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a  
child restraint system on the front passenger  
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do  
not change the backrest width again and do  
not call up a memory position.  
LATCH child restraint  
system  
General information  
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-  
dren.  
Pay attention to the specifications, operating  
tips and safety instructions from the child re-  
straint system manufacturer when selecting,  
installing, and using LATCH child restraint sys-  
tems.  
112  
 
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Position  
Mounts for lower anchors  
Icon  
Meaning  
General information  
The lower anchors may be used to attach the  
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child  
is restrained by the internal harnesses.  
The corresponding icon shows  
the mounts for the lower  
LATCH anchors.  
Seats equipped with lower an-  
chors are marked with a pair  
(2) of LATCH icons.  
Safety information  
For vehicles equipped with a  
middle seat:  
Warning  
If the lower anchors on child restraint system  
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint  
system will not be able to provide suitable  
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger  
to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are  
correctly engaged and that the child restraint  
system fits securely against the backrest.  
It is not recommended to use  
the inner lower anchors of  
standard outer LATCH posi-  
tions to fasten a child restraint  
system on the middle seat.  
Use the vehicle seat belt in-  
stead for the middle seat.  
Before attaching child restraint  
systems  
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the  
child seat mountings.  
Warning  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
Installing child restraint systems  
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-  
turer's information.  
2. Make sure that the child restraint system  
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-  
chor on both sides.  
Child restraint systems with  
tether strap  
General information  
When attaching child restraint systems to the  
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-  
cations and the operating and safety informa-  
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.  
113  
 
 
Transporting children safely  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Attachment points for upper  
retaining strap  
Warning  
Icon  
Meaning  
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used  
for the child restraint system, the protective  
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-  
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided  
to the upper attachment point without twist-  
ing and not over sharp edges.  
The respective icon shows the  
attachment point for the upper  
retaining strap. Seats with an  
upper top tether are marked  
with this icon. It is located on  
the rear seat backrest, the rear  
shelf or the rear seat.  
Warning  
Routing the retaining strap  
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the  
protective effect of the child restraint system  
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,  
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of  
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold  
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to  
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests  
are locked.  
Warning  
1
Driving direction  
The mounts for the lower anchors and at-  
tachment points of the child restraint system  
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-  
tems only. If other objects are attached, the  
mounts or attachment points can be dam-  
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-  
age to property. Only attach child restraint  
systems at the corresponding mounts for the  
lower anchors or attachment points.  
2
3
4
5
6
Upper retaining strap  
Head restraint  
Rear shelf  
Attachment point  
Hook for upper retaining strap  
Attaching the upper retaining strap  
to the attachment point  
1. Open the attachment point cover.  
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the  
head restraint to the anchor.  
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the  
attachment point.  
4. Tighten the retaining strap.  
114  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Driving  
The Start/Stop button is located on the  
center console.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Driving off  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2. Apply gear position.  
3. Driving off.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
Start/Stop button  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Acoustic Pedestrian Protection  
generates a continuous driving noise in vehi-  
cles with electric or electrically assisted drives.  
Principle  
Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-  
ready state on/off.  
▷
With a stationary vehicle and drive-ready  
state turned on, as soon as the selector  
lever position P is exited.  
General information  
Drive-ready state turns on when the brake  
pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop  
button.  
▷
With electric driving up to approx.  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the  
environment. As a result, other road users,  
for instance pedestrians or cyclists, can better  
perceive the vehicle.  
Pressing the Start/Stop button again turns  
drive-ready state back off and turns standby  
state back on.  
Additional information:  
Auto Start/Stop function  
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 44.  
Standby state, refer to page 43.  
Principle  
Overview  
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.  
The system switches off the engine during a  
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic  
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.  
The engine starts automatically for driving off.  
General information  
The Auto Start/Stop function switches to  
standby whenever the engine is started using  
the Start/Stop button.  
The function is activated at low speeds.  
115  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the ambient temperature is high and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
Engine stop  
Functional requirements  
The engine is switched off automatically when  
stopping under the following conditions:  
Vehicle interior has not yet been heated or  
cooled as desired.  
When window condensation is possible and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-  
tion D.  
Engine or other components are not at op-  
erating temperature.  
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed while  
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is  
held by Automatic Hold.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.  
Vehicle battery is deeply discharged.  
At higher elevations.  
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-  
er's door is closed.  
The hood is unlocked.  
For stop-and-go traffic.  
After driving in reverse.  
Manual engine stop  
If the engine was not switched off automati-  
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can  
be switched off manually:  
Without Mild Hybrid technology: Wheels are  
at a sharp angle or steering wheel is being  
turned.  
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again  
from the current pedal position.  
▷
Selector lever position is S or R.  
▷
Engage selector lever position P.  
Starting the engine  
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,  
the engine switches off.  
Functional requirements  
The engine starts automatically under the fol-  
lowing preconditions:  
Air conditioning system when the  
engine is switched off  
The air flow from the air conditioning system is  
reduced when the engine is switched off.  
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.  
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on  
the accelerator pedal.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Driving off  
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.  
The display in the instrument  
cluster indicates that the Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
an automatic engine start.  
Safety mode  
After the engine switches off automatically, it  
will not start again automatically if any one of  
the following conditions are met:  
Functional limitations  
The engine does not switch off automatically in  
situations like the following:  
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is open.  
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.  
▷
Hood was unlocked.  
Brake pedal was not depressed hard  
enough.  
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied  
length of time.  
116  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The engine can only be started using the Start/  
Stop button.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: Via  
button  
System limits  
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-  
tivated engine starts up automatically in the  
following situations:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle interior is extremely hot when the  
cooling is on.  
Vehicle interior is extremely cold when the  
heating is on.  
When window condensation is possible and  
automatic climate control is switched on.  
Press the button.  
▷
LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop  
function is deactivated.  
Without mild hybrid technology:  
In case of a steering operation.  
▷
LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is ena-  
bled.  
▷
▷
▷
When changing selector lever position from  
D or P.  
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-  
tery.  
Via selector lever position  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled  
in selector lever position S.  
When starting an oil level measurement.  
Deactivating the system manually  
Via the Driving Experience Control  
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-  
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving  
Experience Control.  
Principle  
In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic jams,  
it may be helpful to deactivate Auto Start/  
Stop manually. The engine will then no longer  
switch off automatically.  
Switching off the vehicle during an  
automatic engine stop  
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle  
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.  
If this function is deactivated while the engine  
is being stopped automatically, the engine will  
start.  
1. Press the Start/Stop button.  
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.  
Standby state is switched on.  
Selector lever position P is engaged au-  
tomatically.  
2. Set the parking brake.  
Automatic deactivation  
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-  
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-  
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.  
117  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Parking position P  
Malfunction  
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer  
switches off the engine automatically. A Check  
Control message is displayed. You may con-  
tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
Selector lever position, for instance for parking  
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive  
in selector lever position P.  
Engage selector lever position P only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Steptronic transmission  
P is engaged automatically  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally in situations such as the following:  
Principle  
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's  
automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it  
offers the option of manual shifting if needed.  
▷
▷
▷
After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-  
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.  
After standby is switched off, if selector  
lever position N is engaged.  
Safety information  
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the  
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is  
stationary and selector lever position D, S,  
or R is engaged.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
your vehicle, secure it against rolling away,  
e.g., by applying the parking brake.  
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-  
lector lever position P is engaged and the  
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-  
cle may begin to move.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 125.  
Selector lever positions  
Engaging selector lever positions  
Gear position D  
Selector lever position for normal driving. All  
gears for forward travel are activated automat-  
ically.  
General information  
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you  
select a gear position or reverse gear, main-  
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are  
ready to drive off.  
R reverse gear  
Engage selector lever position R only when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
Functional requirements  
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on  
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible  
to change from selector lever position P to an-  
other selector lever position.  
N Neutral  
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without  
drive, for instance in car washes, in selector  
lever position N.  
The selection lever position P cannot be  
changed until all technical prerequisites are  
met.  
118  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Engaging selector lever position D, N,  
R
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.  
NOTICE  
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired  
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.  
The selector lever automatically returns to  
the center position when released.  
Selector lever position P is automatically en-  
gaged when standby state is switched off.  
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk  
of damage to property. Do not switch off  
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,  
in a car wash.  
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing  
on the brake pedal.  
2. If necessary, release the parking brake and  
switch off Automatic Hold.  
3. Depress the brake pedal.  
4. Engage selector lever position N.  
5. Switch off drive-ready state.  
Engaging selector lever position P  
In this way, standby state remains switched  
on, and a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
Press the button.  
The parking brake is applied and the  
transmission lock is engaged.  
The vehicle can roll.  
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-  
cally after approximately 35 minutes.  
If the system is not operational, you may not  
be able to change the selector lever position.  
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if  
needed.  
Additional information:  
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,  
refer to page 120.  
Press button P.  
The transmission lock is engaged.  
Kickdown  
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving  
performance.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle  
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-  
sistance point at the full throttle position.  
General information  
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to  
roll without its own drive for a short distance,  
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.  
119  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
S Sport mode  
Electronic unlocking of the  
transmission lock  
Principle  
General information  
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-  
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a  
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.  
The shifting points and shifting times in the  
Sport program are designed for sportier han-  
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up  
later and the shifting times are shorter.  
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure  
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance  
with a wheel chock.  
Activating the Sport program  
Engaging selector lever position N  
1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three  
times without pressing the brake.  
2. Depress the brake pedal.  
3. Press the selector lever to position N until  
position N is shown on the selector lever.  
An appropriate Check Control message is  
displayed.  
Pull the selector lever from selector lever posi-  
tion D to D/S.  
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous  
area and secure it against rolling away.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance S1.  
The sport program of the transmission is acti-  
vated.  
Shift paddles  
Ending the Sport program  
Pull the selector lever to D/S.  
Principle  
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are  
used to change gears manually.  
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
General information  
The selector lever position is  
displayed, for example P.  
Shifting  
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and  
road speeds.  
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts  
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when  
speed limits are reached.  
Temporary manual mode  
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-  
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.  
120  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, for instance D1.  
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-  
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.  
After conservative driving in manual mode  
without acceleration or shifting via the shift  
paddles for a certain amount of time, the  
transmission switches back to automatic  
mode.  
Advanced mode  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-  
tronic Sport transmission offers an advanced  
mode with adapted shift characteristics.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is  
displayed in the instrument cluster.  
▷
▷
▷
Automatic downshift to lowest possible  
gear.  
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the  
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts  
down to the lowest possible gear.  
Continuous manual mode  
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle  
switches to manual mode M permanently.  
Avoid automatic upshifting in manual  
mode.  
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster, for instance M1.  
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-  
sion does not shift up automatically when  
speed limits are reached.  
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:  
▷
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
There is no downshifting for kickdown.  
Enabling advanced mode  
Advanced mode is active in manual mode.  
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
Pull the selector lever to D/S.  
"SPORT": The driving mode must be selected  
and configured depending on vehicle equip-  
ment.  
When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is  
stationary, the transmission will no longer shift  
back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained  
until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode  
M is exited.  
Launch Control  
Shifting  
Principle  
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  
on roads with good traction under dry sur-  
rounding conditions.  
General information  
Using Launch Control causes premature com-  
ponent wear since this function represents a  
very heavy load for the vehicle.  
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off  
with Launch Control.  
▷
▷
Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.  
Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.  
121  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in  
the vehicle.  
After using Launch Control  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Additional information:  
Break-in, refer to page 270.  
System limits  
An experienced driver may be able to achieve  
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without  
Launch Control mode.  
Functional requirement  
Launch Control can be used when the engine  
is at operating temperature. The engine is at  
operating temperature after an uninterrupted  
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.  
Steptronic Sport  
transmission: sprint function  
Driving off with Launch Control  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
Principle  
Depending on the equipment, the Sprint func-  
tion can be used for an upcoming acceleration  
process. The Sprint function prepares the driv-  
etrain for the acceleration process.  
2.  
Press the button.  
3. Activate TRACTION on the control display.  
4. Engage selector lever position S.  
5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on  
the brake.  
General information  
When the Sprint function is activated, the re-  
sponse characteristics of the vehicle will be-  
come more dynamic.  
6. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-  
tle position, kickdown.  
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Activating  
1. Keep the left shift paddle pulled until  
SPRINT is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait  
briefly until the engine speed is constant.  
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.  
8. Release the brake within a few seconds of  
the destination flag illuminating.  
▷
The transmission shifts down to the  
lowest possible gear and switches to  
manual operation M.  
The vehicle accelerates.  
▷
A dynamic setting has been activated  
for the drivetrain.  
Upshifting is performed automatically as  
long as the destination flag is displayed  
and the accelerator pedal is not released.  
2. Change gears manually.  
Repeated use during a trip  
Automatic deactivation  
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-  
mission must cool down for a short time before  
Launch Control can be used again. Launch  
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions  
when used again.  
The Sprint function is ended automatically  
when driving moderately for a defined period  
of time.  
122  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Manual deactivation  
Button  
Driving mode  
▷
Keep the right shift paddle pulled until  
SPRINT is no longer displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster.  
SPORT  
SPORT PLUS  
SPORT INDIVIDUAL  
▷
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,  
pull the left shift paddle.  
COMFORT  
Press the selector lever from selector lever  
position S to D.  
ECO PRO  
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL  
Driving Experience Control  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Principle  
The Driving Experience Control influences,  
among other things, the vehicle's driving dy-  
namics.  
The selected driving mode is  
displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the  
situation using various driving modes.  
Activating/deactivating drive modes  
Press the button for the desired drive mode  
repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis-  
played in the instrument cluster.  
General information  
The following systems may be affected, for in-  
stance:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Drivetrain.  
When changing the drive mode, the current  
drive mode is deactivated.  
Chassis.  
Steering.  
Driving modes in detail  
Display in the instrument cluster.  
Cruise control.  
COMFORT  
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced  
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-  
mized driving.  
Overview  
Buttons in the vehicle  
SPORT  
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting  
for more agility with an optimized suspension.  
SPORT PLUS  
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic  
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted  
drive.  
123  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
ECO PRO  
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-  
timized.  
Safety information  
Warning  
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the  
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.  
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened  
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.  
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-  
hicle can be opened from the outside.  
INDIVIDUAL configuration  
General information  
For some driving modes, there is another  
mode that can be adjusted individually.  
The individual configuration set last is acti-  
vated directly when the driving mode is called  
up again.  
Warning  
For some national-market versions, unlock-  
ing from the inside is only possible with par-  
ticular knowledge.  
Configuring and resetting  
E.g., ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode:  
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time  
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-  
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from  
the outside when there are people or animals  
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals  
alone in the vehicle.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard  
settings:  
My Programs in detail  
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"  
My Pro-  
grams  
Description  
Enabling INDIVIDUAL  
Press the button for the desired driving mode  
several times.  
"REAR  
This program creates an at-  
SEAT VIEW" mosphere that encourages  
sleep for children in the rear.  
My Programs  
Activating/deactivating My  
Programs  
Principle  
1.  
Apps menu  
Various vehicle functions in the vehicle interior  
are adapted to each other in a program.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "REAR SEAT VIEW"  
When a program is selected, for example, the  
interior lighting, climate control, and music se-  
lection are adjusted.  
124  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Parking brake  
Button in the vehicle  
Principle  
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-  
cle from rolling away when it is parked.  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
Parking brake  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Setting the parking brake  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
With a stationary vehicle  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
Pull the switch.  
The LED illuminates.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red.  
The parking brake is set.  
Warning  
While driving  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Use while driving serves as an emergency  
braking function.  
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle  
brakes hard while the switch is being  
pulled.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,  
and the brake lights illuminate.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
125  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
With Emergency Stop Assistant  
1. Turn on standby state.  
Briefly pull the switch to trigger the  
Emergency Stop Assistant.  
2.  
Pull the switch while stepping on the  
brake pedal or selector lever position P is  
set and then push.  
Additional information:  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 183.  
This process may take a few seconds. Some  
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-  
ess are normal.  
Releasing the parking brake  
The indicator light is no longer illumi-  
nated as soon as the parking brake is  
ready for operation again.  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
2.  
Press the switch while stepping on  
the brake pedal or selector lever position P  
is set.  
Automatic Hold  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
The parking brake is released.  
Principle  
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automat-  
ically applying and releasing the brake, for ex-  
ample, in stop-and-go traffic.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
The parking brake is released automatically  
when you drive off.  
The vehicle is automatically held in place when  
it is stationary.  
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-  
cle from rolling back when driving off.  
The LED and the indicator light go out.  
Malfunction  
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-  
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away  
before you exit.  
General information  
The parking brake is automatically engaged  
under the following conditions:  
▷
▷
If drive-ready state is turned off.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
If the driver’s door is opened while the vehi-  
cle is stationary.  
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-  
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of  
the vehicle.  
▷
If the parking brake is used to brake the  
vehicle to a stop while driving.  
After a power interruption  
To reestablish parking brake operability after  
a power interruption, an initialization may be  
required.  
Safety information  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
126  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
Overview  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
Button in the vehicle  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
Warning  
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle  
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger  
themselves and traffic, for example, due to  
the following actions:  
Automatic Hold  
Activating Automatic Hold  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
▷
▷
▷
Establishing standby.  
Releasing the parking brake.  
Opening and closing the doors or win-  
dows.  
2.  
Press the button.  
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.  
Using vehicle equipment.  
The LED illuminates.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
Automatic Hold is activated.  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Do not leave children or animals un-  
attended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key  
with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.  
After every vehicle restart, the last se-  
lected setting is active.  
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle  
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s  
door is closed.  
NOTICE  
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold  
engages the parking brake and prevents the  
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a  
risk of damage to property. Deactivate Auto-  
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash.  
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-  
ically secured against rolling away as  
soon as the indicator light illuminates  
green.  
Driving off  
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.  
The brake is released automatically and the  
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer  
illuminated.  
127  
 
 
Driving  
CONTROLS  
Automatic parking brake application  
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-  
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is  
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle  
is exited.  
The indicator light changes from green  
to red.  
The parking brake is not set automatically if  
the drive-ready state was switched off while  
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is  
temporarily deactivated in this case.  
Deactivate Automatic Hold  
Press the button.  
The LED goes out.  
The indicator light goes out.  
Automatic Hold is switched off.  
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,  
also press on the brake pedal when switching  
off.  
128  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displays  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Overview  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Instrument cluster  
Principle  
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-  
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,  
temperature as well as indicator and warning  
lights.  
Instrument cluster  
Display ranges on the instrument  
cluster  
General information  
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to  
the respective driving mode. The positions of  
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever  
display.  
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster  
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's  
Manual.  
1
Speedometer  
Safety information  
2
3
4
Driver assistance systems 197  
Driver Attention Camera 191  
Check Control 132  
Warning  
If the driving information displays on the in-  
strument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer,  
do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Imme-  
diately park the vehicle in a safe manner.  
Turning drive-ready state off and on again  
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to  
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be  
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-  
Selector lever display 118  
Gear shift indicator 141  
Selection lists 140  
Using ECO PRO efficiently 277  
Power gauge 141  
5
6
Tachometer 142  
Engine temperature 142  
129  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
7
Outside temperature 143  
Central display range 144  
Shift lights 143  
8
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
9
Drive mode 123  
10 Speed Limit Info 197  
Speed Limit Assistant 211  
11 Time 147  
Settings  
Specific displays can be configured individu-  
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.  
12 Fuel gauge 147  
Range 147  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Additional information:  
4. "Instrument cluster"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 133.  
Operating elements on the steering  
wheel  
Live Vehicle  
Operating  
element  
Function  
Principle  
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your  
own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-  
hicle status or energy flow indicators.  
Display the menu bar on the  
instrument cluster.  
Press the corresponding arrow  
key to move the selection.  
General information  
Appropriate information is shown on the con-  
trol display depending on the driving situation.  
Fault statuses are not taken into account.  
Turn knurled wheel: scroll se-  
lection up or down.  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
Adaptive content  
The following content is displayed in alternat-  
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the  
selected drive mode:  
Configuring the layout  
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout in the in-  
strument cluster can be individually configured  
and displayed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 148.  
Current driving condition, refer to page 149.  
Sport displays, refer to page 149.  
Driving style analysis, refer to page 278.  
Trip data, refer to page 144.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
Static information  
The following information may be shown per-  
manently on the control display regardless of  
the driving situation and driving mode set.  
2. "LAYOUT"  
130  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Vehicle status.  
Trip data.  
Overview  
Adjusting the display  
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-  
tween an adaptive display and static content.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
Head-up display views are projected onto the  
windshield through a protective glass. The pro-  
tective glass is located between the steering  
wheel and windshield.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
BMW Head-up display  
Displayable information  
The following information is displayed on the  
Head-up display:  
Principle  
The Head-up display projects important infor-  
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the  
driver's field of view. Information can be re-  
corded without you having to look away from  
the road.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.  
Navigation instructions.  
Check Control messages.  
Sport displays.  
The steering wheel buttons can be used to  
configure various views for the Head-up dis-  
play. Additional settings can be changed on  
the control display, e.g., brightness or height.  
Shift lights.  
Lists and messages.  
Driver assistance systems.  
Some of this information is only displayed  
briefly as needed.  
General information  
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up  
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.  
Configuring a view  
The views for the Head-up display can be set  
independently of the display on the instrument  
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.  
Additional information:  
Caring for special components, refer to  
page 343.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
2. "HEAD-UP"  
131  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
Special windshield  
The windshield is part of the system.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
The shape and coating of the special wind-  
shield enable the system to function.  
If damaged, have the special windshield re-  
placed by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Turning the Head-up display on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Check Control  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. "Head-up display"  
Principle  
The Check Control system monitors functions  
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the  
monitored systems.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be entered for the  
Head-up display such as for the height, bright-  
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-  
plays in the Head-up display can be set up  
separately such as for Driver Assistance.  
A Check Control message is displayed as  
a combination of indicator lights or warning  
lights and text messages on the instrument  
cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up dis-  
play. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound  
and a text message may appear on the control  
display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Displays"  
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-  
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they  
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages  
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent  
Check Control messages are permanently dis-  
played but may be hidden temporarily.  
4. "Head-up display"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Visibility of the display  
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up  
display is influenced by the following factors:  
Hiding Check Control messages  
▷
▷
Seat position.  
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-  
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-  
sages are automatically displayed again after  
approx. 8 seconds.  
Objects on the Head-up display's protective  
glass.  
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-  
tective glass.  
An arrow icon next to the Check Control  
message indicates whether the Check Control  
message can be hidden.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.  
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.  
Wet road.  
To hide Check Control messages, press  
the left arrow button on the steering  
wheel.  
Unfavorable light conditions.  
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-  
tings checked by an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
132  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displaying stored Check Control  
messages  
Additional information such as the cause of a  
fault or the required action can be called up via  
Check Control.  
Indicator lights and warning  
lights  
Principle  
The indicator lights and the warning lights on  
the instrument cluster show the status of some  
functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights  
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored  
systems.  
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-  
ther help can be selected.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
General information  
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-  
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.  
4. "Check Control"  
5. Select the desired text message.  
Several of the lights are checked for proper  
functioning and illuminate temporarily when  
drive-ready state is turned on.  
Display  
A Check Control message is displayed in the  
instrument cluster as a text message with an  
icon.  
Red lights  
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-  
matically displayed on the control display.  
Seat belt reminder  
If several faults occur at once, the messages  
are displayed consecutively.  
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not  
buckled.  
Certain messages displayed while driving are  
displayed again after drive-ready state is  
switched off.  
Additional information:  
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 104.  
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate  
an active or saved Check Control mes-  
sage.  
Airbag system  
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-  
cates that the entire airbag system and  
seat belt tensioners are operational  
when drive-ready state is switched on.  
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates  
continuously: the airbag system or the seat  
belt tensioners may not be operational. Have  
the vehicle checked immediately by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Additional information:  
Airbags, refer to page 163.  
133  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
Parking brake  
The parking brake is set.  
Additional information:  
Parking brake, refer to page 125.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Warning with braking func-  
tion, refer to page 171.  
Brake system  
The brake pads are worn or there is  
another issue with the brake system.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the right  
The braking assistance may not be op-  
erational. A higher pedal force may be  
required for the braking process.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the right  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
Additional information:  
Intersection Collision Warning with city braking  
function, refer to page 173.  
Additional information:  
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 183.  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
detected from the left  
Pedestrian Warning  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian  
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle crossing from the left  
detected. Increased awareness is re-  
quired.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-  
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-  
ing or an evasive maneuver.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle  
detected. Immediately initiate braking or an  
evasive maneuver.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer  
to page 172.  
Intersection Collision Warning with city braking  
function, refer to page 173.  
Forward Collision Warning  
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle  
from undetectable direction of travel  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-  
sion with vehicle from unrecognizable  
134  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
direction of travel detected. Increased aware-  
ness is required.  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk  
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.  
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-  
neuver.  
Yellow lights  
Antilock Braking System  
The system may not be operational.  
The Antilock Braking System is not  
available.  
Additional information:  
Intersection Collision Warning with city braking  
function, refer to page 173.  
The ability to steer may be restricted  
during full braking.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance  
Control  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-  
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-  
sary.  
Additional information:  
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 192.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 204.  
Steering Assistant  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal may sound: A system interrup-  
tion is imminent.  
Steering Assistant  
Depending on national-market version:  
The warning light flashes or illumi-  
nates. A signal sounds:  
Warning light flashes: Lane boundary has  
been crossed.  
Additional information:  
The system is switched off.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:  
hands not on steering wheel  
Steering and Lane Control Assistant:  
hands not on steering wheel  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Warning light illuminates and acoustic  
signal sounds:  
Grab the steering wheel with your  
hands.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. System interruption is imminent.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
The system reduces the speed to a standstill if  
applicable.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
It is possible that the system will not execute  
any supporting steering movements.  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Grab the steering wheel with your hands.  
Additional information:  
135  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-  
ing style to the road conditions.  
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-  
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot  
be detected.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability  
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with  
the same radio frequency: after leaving the  
area of the interference, the system auto-  
matically becomes active again.  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
In the case of tires with special appro-  
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable  
to complete the reset. Reset the system  
again.  
Additional information:  
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 193.  
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:  
Have it checked by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop as needed.  
The Dynamic Stability Control  
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction  
Control activated  
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by  
an authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated  
or Dynamic Traction Control is acti-  
vated.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 300.  
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to  
page 193.  
Steering system  
▷
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to  
page 194.  
The steering system may not be op-  
erational.  
Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Flat tire monitor  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Reduce your speed and stop cau-  
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering  
maneuvers.  
Exhaust emissions  
▷
The warning light illuminates:  
The exhaust gas quality is declining,  
e.g., because the fuel filler cap is  
fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle  
checked as soon as possible.  
Additional information:  
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 308.  
Tire pressure monitor  
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-  
cumstances:  
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or  
tire pressure loss has been detected.  
Follow the information in the Check  
Control message.  
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-  
ing in the engine.  
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-  
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-  
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-  
136  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
riod can seriously damage emission control  
components, in particular the catalytic con-  
verter.  
Low-beam headlights  
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized  
service center or another qualified service cen-  
ter or repair shop.  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 154.  
Additional information:  
Automatic High Beam Assistant  
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to  
page 326.  
Low-beam headlights are switched on  
and the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant is activated.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection  
High-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the traffic sit-  
uation.  
Acoustic pedestrian protection has  
malfunctioned. Increased caution when  
maneuvering.  
Additional information:  
If malfunctioning repeatedly, have the vehicle  
checked by an authorized service center or an-  
other qualified service center or repair shop.  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 152.  
Additional information:  
Lane departure warning  
Acoustic pedestrian protection, refer to  
page 115.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version:  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on. At least one lane boundary  
has been detected on one side of the vehicle.  
The system is ready to intervene and issue  
warnings. The system can perform steering in-  
terventions.  
Green lights  
Turn signal  
Turn signal is on.  
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator  
light indicates that a turn signal bulb  
has failed.  
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-  
ing a steering intervention.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Turn signal, refer to page 151.  
Lane departure warning, refer to page 175.  
Parking lights  
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held  
automatically  
Parking lights are switched on.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold is ready to use. The  
vehicle is automatically held in place  
when it is stationary.  
Parking lights, low-beam headlights,  
refer to page 154.  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 126.  
137  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured  
against rolling away  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 211.  
The vehicle is automatically secured  
against rolling away after stopping.  
Speed Limit Assist: Apply speed limit  
Additional information:  
The detected speed limit can be ap-  
plied with the SET button. As soon as  
the speed limit has been applied, a  
green checkmark is displayed.  
Automatic Hold, refer to page 126.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
Additional information:  
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-  
tem is switched on.  
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 211.  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
Steering Assistant  
Additional information:  
The system is activated and helps to  
keep the vehicle in the lane.  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 199.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
Cruise Control  
The system is active.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in  
progress  
Additional information:  
Cruise control, refer to page 201.  
Arrow icon for lane change green: the  
system carries out a lane change.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance  
Control  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 219.  
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has  
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-  
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been  
detected ahead of you.  
Lane Change Assistant: lane change  
not possible  
Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has  
driven off.  
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-  
propriate side: system detected a lane  
change request. Lane change not cur-  
rently possible.  
Additional information:  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 204.  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 219.  
Speed Limit Assistant activated  
Lane Change Assistant: functional  
requirements not met  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the  
indicator light illuminates green, to-  
gether with the icon for a speed control  
system. Speed Limit Assistant is active and  
detected speed limits can be applied manually  
for the displayed system.  
Depending on the national-market ver-  
sion:  
138  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Arrow icon for lane change gray: lane change  
not possible; functional requirements not met.  
Cruise Control  
The system is interrupted.  
Additional information:  
Additional information:  
Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 219.  
Cruise control, refer to page 201.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Active Cruise Control with Distance  
Control  
The system is active.  
Additional information:  
Indicator light is illuminated: the system  
is interrupted.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 217.  
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are  
not adequate for the system to work. The sys-  
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes  
until you actively resume control by pressing  
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
Blue lights  
High-beam headlights  
Additional information:  
High-beam headlights have been  
switched on.  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 204.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights, refer to page 151.  
Steering Assistant  
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to  
page 152.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon  
as all function conditions are fulfilled.  
Gray lights  
Additional information:  
Seat belt reminder  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-  
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Additional information:  
Seat belts, refer to page 102.  
The system is interrupted and will acti-  
vate automatically as soon as all func-  
tional requirements are met.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
Additional information:  
The system is interrupted.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 217.  
Additional information:  
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to  
page 199.  
White lights  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
No Distance Control because accelera-  
tor pedal is being pressed.  
Additional information:  
139  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-  
fer to page 204.  
Display  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
The system can be activated.  
Additional information:  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to  
page 217.  
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are  
displayed on the instrument cluster.  
Selection lists  
Principle  
Example: selecting a radio station  
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used  
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or  
the Head-up display.  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
button.  
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.  
Current audio source.  
2.  
To switch to the list of radio sta-  
tions, tilt the knurled wheel to the right.  
List of most recent telephone calls.  
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open  
on the control display.  
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio  
station.  
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected radio station.  
Displaying and using the list  
The selection lists can be displayed and op-  
erated using the operating elements on the  
steering wheel.  
Example: changing the entertainment  
source  
Operating  
elements  
Function  
1.  
Press the entertainment sources  
Turn the knurled wheel: dis-  
play the entertainment list or  
scroll up or down in the list.  
button.  
2.  
To select an entertainment source,  
Press knurled wheel: confirm  
selection.  
turn the knurled wheel.  
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-  
lected entertainment source.  
Press the corresponding arrow  
key to change the entertain-  
ment source.  
Show list of most recent tele-  
phone calls.  
140  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Enabling/disabling the power gauge  
The power display or tachometer is shown de-  
pending on the driving mode selected or the  
individual configuration of the layout.  
Gear shift indicator  
Principle  
The shift point indicator recommends the gear  
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-  
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-  
ing style.  
Display  
General information  
The gear shift indicator is active in manual  
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and  
national-market version.  
Displays  
Information on upshifting, downshifting, or en-  
gaged gear is displayed on the instrument  
cluster.  
Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy  
recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE.  
Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in  
percent, POWER.  
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the  
engaged gear is displayed.  
Example Description  
Reduced drive power  
The available power may be reduced due to  
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-  
cally adjusted accordingly.  
In continuous manual mode M:  
Optimal gear is engaged.  
With shift paddles: temporary  
manual mode.  
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and  
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.  
With shift paddles: Sport program.  
Shift information.  
Additional information:  
Shift paddles, refer to page 120.  
Power gauge  
Principle  
The power gauge indicates the currently  
drawn drive power as a percentage.  
141  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Icon  
Description  
Standby state and drive-  
ready state  
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.  
White icon: increased drive sys-  
tem temperature, for instance  
due to sustained or high  
power demand when driving  
on mountain roads.  
OFF is displayed in the instru-  
ment cluster. Drive-ready state  
is turned off and standby state  
turned on.  
Depending on vehicle equip-  
ment and national-market ver-  
sion:  
READY is displayed in the  
instrument cluster. The Auto  
Start/Stop function is ready for  
automatic engine start.  
Drive power limitation defined  
via the BMW Digital Key.  
System-related functional limi-  
tation.  
Additional information:  
▷
Operating state of the vehicle, refer to  
page 42.  
A Check Control message is  
displayed in addition where ap-  
plicable.  
▷
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 115.  
Engine temperature  
Tachometer  
▷
Cold engine: the needle  
is in the blue temperature  
range, close to the stop of  
the temperature display, and  
the word WARM-UP is dis-  
played.  
General information  
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In  
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect  
the engine.  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
Activating/deactivating the  
tachometer  
The tachometer is displayed depending on the  
selected drive mode or the individually config-  
ured layout.  
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle  
is in the middle or in the left half of the  
temperature display.  
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-  
ature range. In addition, a Check Control  
message is displayed.  
The tachometer display changes depending  
on the selected driving mode.  
Reduced rotational speed range  
Additional information:  
The available rotational speed range may be  
reduced due certain factors such as a cold  
drive system. The tachometer display is auto-  
matically adjusted depending on the available  
rotational speed range.  
Coolant level, refer to page 322.  
142  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
age. Modify your driving style to the weather  
conditions at low temperatures.  
Display  
▷
Cold engine: the needle  
is in the blue temperature  
range, close to the stop of  
the temperature display, and  
the word WARM-UP is dis-  
played.  
Shift lights  
Principle  
Drive at moderate RPM and  
vehicle speeds.  
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at  
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.  
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle  
is in the middle or in the left half of the  
temperature display.  
General information  
The shift lights are active in manual mode M  
and can be displayed on the instrument cluster  
or on the Head-up display in combination with  
the tachometer.  
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-  
ature range. In addition, a Check Control  
message is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Functional prerequisites  
Coolant level, refer to page 322.  
▷
"SPORT": The driving mode must be se-  
lected depending on vehicle equipment.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
▷
To display the shift lights on the Head-up  
display, select Sport view.  
A red indicator light is displayed.  
▷
▷
Manual mode M must be activated.  
Advanced mode must be activated.  
Additional information:  
Advanced mode, refer to page 121.  
Outside temperature  
Display  
General information  
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a  
signal sounds.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate  
an upcoming shift point.  
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃  
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on  
bridges or shady sections of the road. There  
is a risk of accident, injury, or property dam-  
143  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the  
latest.  
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument  
cluster.  
When the maximum rotational speed is  
reached, the entire display flashes red and  
the fuel supply is interrupted in order to  
protect the engine.  
2. "CONTENT"  
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on  
the steering wheel where applicable.  
3. Select the desired setting using the knurled  
wheel on the steering wheel.  
Central display range  
Trip data  
Displayable content  
The following settings can be selected:  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Reduced display.  
The trip data display provides various informa-  
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption  
or trip distance.  
Trip data, refer to page 144.  
Assisted View, refer to page 146.  
Navigation system route preview.  
Navigation system map view.  
G-Meter, refer to page 147.  
Entertainment.  
General information  
The trip data can be displayed on the control  
display and in the instrument cluster.  
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle  
menu, the trip data is shown on the control  
display.  
Android Auto©.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, select functions of  
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-  
played, e.g., map views.  
The values can be displayed and reset de-  
pending on different intervals.  
Display on the control display  
Some contents for the central display range  
can also be configured as a view in the Head-  
up display.  
General information  
Additional information:  
The following trip data is shown on the control  
display:  
Head-up display, refer to page 131.  
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.  
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Average fuel consumption depending  
on the configured interval.  
Configuring the central display  
range  
The content of the central display range on the  
instrument cluster can be configured individu-  
ally, for instance the trip data display.  
▷
▷
▷
Travel time depending on the config-  
ured interval.  
Distance traveled depending on the  
configured interval.  
Distance traveled in Coasting mode.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
144  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Displaying trip data continuously  
Average consumption  
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-  
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip  
data are configured.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Live Vehicle"  
4. "Content"  
5. "Trip data"  
Adjusting the display of the trip data  
The intervals for the display of the trip data  
in the instrument cluster and on the control  
display are adjustable.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Information on consumption and distance cov-  
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter.  
Using the button on the left steering column  
switch:  
1. Press the button.  
The trip data is displayed.  
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.  
Average consumption, arrow 2.  
2. Press button repeatedly until the desired  
setting is displayed.  
Distance traveled depending on the config-  
ured interval, arrow 3.  
Via iDrive:  
The icon is displayed when the vehicle  
is in Coasting mode.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
Total mileage, arrow 4.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Values"  
Current consumption  
The current fuel consumption display allows  
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,  
to drive economically and in an environmen-  
tally-friendly manner.  
6. Select the desired setting:  
▷
"Since start of trip": the values are auto-  
matically reset approx. four hours after  
the vehicle has come to a standstill.  
Mild hybrid technology: Depending on vehi-  
cle equipment, the fuel supply is interrupted  
and the engine continues to run when driving  
slowly or even when the vehicle is stationary.  
In this case, the internal combustion engine is  
operated electrically.  
▷
"Since last refuel": the values are au-  
tomatically reset after refueling with a  
larger quantity of fuel.  
145  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
"Since factory": the values since the  
time of the factory delivery are dis-  
played.  
Assisted View  
Principle  
"Since Individual": the values since the  
last manual reset are displayed. The  
values can be reset at any time.  
With Assisted View, information on driver as-  
sistance systems can be displayed on the in-  
strument cluster with a vehicle animation.  
Resetting average values manually  
The following interval can be reset manually at  
any time:  
Safety information  
Warning  
"Since Individual ( )"  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Using the button on the left steering column  
switch:  
1. Press the button.  
The trip data is displayed.  
General  
You can configure how Assisted View is dis-  
played on the central display range.  
2. Press and hold the button until the values  
are reset.  
Additional information:  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
Via iDrive:  
1.  
Apps menu  
Display  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Time period for trip data"  
5. "Reset Individual"  
The average values and counters are reset.  
Once the average values and counters have  
been reset, the following interval is automati-  
cally activated:  
"Since Individual ( )"  
An example of active Driver Assistance: Indica-  
tor and warning lights for Distance Control and  
Assisted Driving Mode are displayed. At the  
146  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
same time, the Distance Control is animated in  
Assisted View.  
automatic time zone enabled. With automatic  
time setting, the time, date and, if necessary,  
the time zone are updated automatically.  
System limits  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Only objects that are detected by the system  
are taken into account.  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Date and time"  
5. Select the desired settings.  
The system may indicate something wrong.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 37.  
Fuel gauge  
Radar sensors, refer to page 38.  
Principle  
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-  
played.  
G-Meter  
General information  
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-  
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction  
on the vehicle occupants while driving.  
General information  
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to  
vary.  
The display can be configured on the central  
display range of the instrument cluster.  
Additional information:  
Refueling, refer to page 282.  
The values are automatically reset whenever  
you start a new drive.  
Display  
Additional information:  
An arrow beside the fuel pump  
icon shows which side of the ve-  
hicle the fuel filler flap is on.  
Central display area, refer to page 144  
Manually reseting G-Meter values  
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument  
cluster.  
The current range is displayed  
as numerical value.  
Indicator light in the instrument  
cluster  
2.  
Press and hold the knurled wheel  
on the steering wheel until the values are  
reset.  
The yellow indicator light illuminates,  
once the fuel reserve is reached.  
Date and time  
Range  
Various settings can be applied for the date  
and time display such as the date format.  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the time zone can be set or  
The range indicates the distance that can still  
be covered with the current tank of fuel.  
147  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
4. "Units"  
General information  
The estimated range with remaining fuel is  
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Vehicle status  
With a low remaining range, a Check Control  
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining  
range means that engine functions cannot al-  
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when  
cornering at speed.  
General information  
The status can be displayed and actions per-  
formed for several systems such as for Check  
Control.  
The Check Control message appears  
continuously below a range of approx.  
30 miles/50 km.  
Displaying vehicle status  
1.  
Apps menu  
Safety information  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
NOTICE  
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the  
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.  
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel  
promptly.  
Overview  
Icon  
Description  
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-  
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer  
to page 308.  
Display  
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status  
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,  
refer to page 300.  
The current range is displayed  
as a numerical value next to the  
fuel gauge.  
"Engine oil level": electronic  
oil measurement, refer to  
page 320.  
"Check Control": displaying  
stored Check Control mes-  
sages, refer to page 132.  
Setting the units of  
measurement  
"Service": display of the serv-  
ice notifications, refer to  
page 149.  
Depending on the national-market version, you  
can set the units of measurement for some  
values, for instance consumption, distances,  
and temperature.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
148  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
Current driving condition  
Sport displays  
General information  
The current driving condition is displayed dy-  
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle  
menu on the control display.  
Principle  
The Sport displays especially support a sporty  
driving style.  
Functional requirements  
The following states can be displayed:  
▷
SPORT driving mode is selected.  
▷
▷
▷
Driving.  
▷
The following setting is selected for Live  
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"  
Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING"  
"CHARGING BATTERY"  
With mild hybrid technology:  
Display  
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation.  
The sport displays are displayed in the Live  
Vehicle menu on the control display.  
Efficient rolling with engine switched off.  
Additional information:  
The following information is displayed:  
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 278.  
Coasting, refer to page 279.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Torque.  
Power.  
Boost pressure.  
Engine oil temperature.  
Functional requirements  
▷
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se-  
lected.  
▷
For Live Vehicle, select the following set-  
ting: "Adaptive content".  
Service  
Principle  
The service notifications indicate recom-  
mended maintenance work.  
Display  
General information  
After turning on, the next service appointment  
or the distance remaining until the next servic-  
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-  
ter.  
A service advisor can read out the mainte-  
nance work from the vehicle key.  
An example:  
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.  
Display  
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-  
cle decelerates, arrow 2.  
More information may be displayed on the  
control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
149  
 
 
Displays  
CONTROLS  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
Maintenance measures as well as legally  
mandated inspections are displayed.  
5. Select the desired entry.  
Entering appointment dates  
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can  
be entered.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are  
set correctly.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Vehicle status"  
4. "Service"  
5. "Vehicle inspection"  
6. "Date:"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
150  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Light and view  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "One-touch turn signal"  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Brief flashing  
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  
it there for as long as you want the turn signal  
to flash.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
High-beam headlights,  
headlight flasher  
Turn signal  
Turn signal in exterior mirror  
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.  
When driving and during operation of the turn  
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold  
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal  
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.  
Flashing  
▷
▷
High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.  
The high-beam headlights illuminate when  
the low-beam headlights are switched on.  
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,  
arrow 2.  
Press the lever past the resistance point.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates when the high-beam  
headlights are turned on.  
One-touch signaling  
Lightly tap the lever up or down.  
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-  
justed.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
151  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
The headlights are automatically changed be-  
tween low-beam headlights and high-beam  
headlights.  
Principle  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects  
other road users early on and automatically  
switches the high-beam headlights on or off  
depending on the traffic situation.  
The blue indicator light in the instru-  
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-  
tem switches on the high-beam head-  
lights.  
General information  
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-  
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic  
High Beam Assistant remains activated when  
continuing the journey.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures  
that the high-beam headlights are switched  
on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the  
low speed range, the high-beam headlights  
are not switched on by the system.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti-  
vated when manually switching the high-beam  
headlights on and off.  
The system responds to light from oncoming  
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to  
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-  
ies.  
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-  
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.  
The high-beam headlights can be switched on  
and off manually at any time.  
Deactivating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Functional requirements  
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.  
▷
Low-beam headlights are switched on.  
Activating Automatic High Beam  
Assistant  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
Sensitivity of the Automatic High  
Beam Assistant  
General information  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant can be adjusted.  
Press the button on the turn signal lever.  
152  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions  
such as fog or heavy precipitation.  
Safety information  
When detecting poorly-lit road users such  
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders  
and wagons; when driving close to train or  
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.  
Warning  
If adjustments have been made or the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic  
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. If  
adjustments have been made and the sen-  
sitivity has been modified, make sure that  
oncoming traffic is not momentarily blinded.  
Switch off the high-beam headlights man-  
ually if required.  
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,  
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-  
ing traffic on highways.  
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-  
ence of highly reflective signs.  
When the windshield in the area in front  
of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or  
covered with stickers, etc.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.  
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Light is turned off.  
Exterior lighting  
Overview  
Increasing sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-  
proximately 10 seconds.  
Buttons in the vehicle  
A Check Control message is displayed. The  
system responds more sensitively.  
Resetting the sensitivity  
Push the turn signal lever to the front again  
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-  
ready state.  
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam  
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.  
Icon  
Function  
Exterior lighting off.  
System limits  
Daytime driving lights.  
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot  
replace the driver's personal judgment of when  
to use the high-beam headlights. When appro-  
priate, dim the high beams manually.  
Parking lights.  
Automatic headlight control.  
Adaptive lighting functions.  
The system may not be fully operational in  
the following situations, and driver intervention  
may be necessary:  
Low-beam headlights.  
153  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Function  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster is illuminated when the low-  
beam headlights are switched on.  
Icon  
Instrument lighting.  
System limits  
The automatic headlight control cannot re-  
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-  
tions.  
Right roadside parking light.  
Left roadside parking light.  
For example, the sensors are unable to detect  
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn  
the lights on manually.  
Buttons on the vehicle key  
Icon  
Function  
Parking lights, low-beam  
headlights and roadside  
parking lights  
Interior lighting.  
Parts of the exterior lighting.  
Pathway lighting.  
General information  
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-  
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting  
is automatically switched off after a period of  
time.  
Driving lights automatic  
Principle  
Parking lights  
The low-beam headlights are switched on and  
off automatically depending on the ambient  
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight  
or if there is precipitation.  
General information  
The parking lights can only be turned on at low  
speeds.  
General information  
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  
cause the lights to be turned on.  
Turning on parking lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
If the low-beam headlights are switched on  
manually, the automatic headlight control is  
deactivated.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.  
Activate automatic headlight control  
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-  
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle  
battery and it would then be impossible to  
switch on drive-ready state.  
Press the button on the light switch.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
154  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Turning off parking lights  
Button Function  
The following options are available to turn off  
the parking lights:  
Right roadside parking light on.  
Left roadside parking light off.  
▷
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
Turn on drive-ready state.  
After the drive-ready state is switched on,  
the automatic headlight control will be acti-  
vated.  
Switching off the roadside parking light:  
Press the button on the light switch or  
turn on drive-ready state.  
Low-beam headlights  
Turning on low-beam headlights  
Welcome lights  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Principle  
The low-beam headlights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
The welcome light turns on automatically for  
a limited period of time when approaching or  
unlocking the vehicle.  
The indicator light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the exterior  
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.  
Press the button again to switch on the low-  
beam headlights when the standby state is  
switched on.  
Activating/deactivating welcome  
light  
Turning off low-beam headlights  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
low-beam headlights can be turned off in the  
low speed range:  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
▷
Press the button on the light switch.  
5. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
Roadside parking lights  
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-  
side parking light can be switched on.  
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"  
When unlocking the vehicle, individual  
lighting functions are turned on.  
155  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Turning on the welcome light  
Setting the duration  
▷
Automatically on approach.  
1.  
Apps menu  
▷
During unlocking.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. "Pathway lighting"  
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key  
with the vehicle locked.  
Depending on the settings, the interior  
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will  
be turned on.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Daytime driving lights  
The function is not available for the first  
10 seconds after locking.  
General information  
The daytime driving lights illuminate when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
Welcome Light Carpet  
Activating/deactivating daytime  
driving lights  
In some countries, daytime driving lights are  
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-  
vate the daytime driving lights in front.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The light source is located in the position indi-  
cated.  
3. "Exterior lighting"  
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.  
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"  
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-  
tional-market version:  
Pathway lighting  
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"  
"Rear daytime driving lights"  
Principle  
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting  
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-  
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
Adaptive lighting functions  
Principle  
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-  
lumination of the road.  
Switching pathway lighting on  
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,  
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.  
▷
Press and hold the button on the  
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.  
156  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
General information  
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of  
one system or multiple systems, depending on  
the equipment version:  
Laser tail light  
Principle  
The LED rear light includes a decorative laser  
component.  
▷
Cornering light.  
Activating the adaptive lighting  
functions  
General information  
The laser rear light is integrated into the tail  
light and emits from there.  
Press the button on the light switch.  
Depending on the national-market version, ad-  
ditional information can be found on the laser  
sign in the tail light.  
The LED in the button illuminates.  
The adaptive lighting functions are active  
when the drive-ready state is switched on.  
Safety information  
Cornering light  
Principle  
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous  
roads or when turning, an additional cornering  
light is switched on that illuminates the inside  
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below  
a certain speed.  
Laser class 1.  
The sign is located in the tail light and is visible  
from the outside.  
General information  
The cornering light is automatically switched  
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,  
where applicable, the use of turn signals.  
Instrument lighting  
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights  
may be automatically switched on regardless  
of the steering-wheel angle.  
Functional requirement  
The brightness can only be adjusted when  
the parking lights or low-beam headlights are  
turned on.  
Adaptive headlight range  
control  
Setting the brightness  
The adaptive headlight range control feature  
balances out acceleration and braking proc-  
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in  
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.  
Adjust the brightness with the  
knurled wheel.  
157  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Interior lighting  
Ambient light  
General information  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, lighting  
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's  
interior.  
Depending on the equipment version, interior  
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient  
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically  
controlled.  
Activating/deactivating ambient  
light  
Overview  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Ambient lighting"  
Turning ambient light on/off  
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-  
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the  
vehicle is locked.  
Reading lights  
Interior lights  
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,  
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is  
unlocked.  
Selecting the color  
Turning interior lights on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
Press the button.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Color"  
To switch off permanently: press the button  
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.  
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle  
can be switched on and off independently. The  
button is located in the rear headliner.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the brightness  
1.  
Apps menu  
Turning reading lights on/off  
2. "Vehicle"  
Press the button.  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Brightness"  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-  
ing lights are located next to the interior lights  
in the front and rear.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
158  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Dynamic light  
NOTICE  
Individual actions, for example incoming calls  
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.  
If the ambient light is disabled, the light effects  
are still displayed.  
The wiper blades can wear out or become  
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry  
window for a longer period of time. The wiper  
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-  
age to property. Do not use the wipers when  
the window is dry.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Dynamic light"  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Reduced for night drive  
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced  
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Turning on window wiper system  
3. "Interior lighting"  
4. If necessary, "Ambience"  
5. "Reduced for night driving"  
Window wiper system  
Safety information  
Warning  
Press the lever up until the desired position is  
reached.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Rest position of the wipers, position 0.  
Rain sensor mode, position 1.  
Normal wiper speed, position 2.  
Fast wiper speed, position 3.  
When the journey is interrupted with the win-  
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey  
continues, the wipers resume at their previous  
speed.  
159  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Activating rain sensor  
Turning off the window wiper  
system and flick wipe  
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-  
row 1.  
Press the lever down.  
Wiping operation is started.  
▷
Turning off: press the lever down until it  
reaches the 0 position.  
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.  
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0  
position.  
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not  
start.  
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-  
sition when released.  
Deactivating rain sensor  
Press lever back into the 0 position.  
Rain sensor  
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity  
Principle  
The rain sensor automatically controls the  
wiper operation depending on the intensity of  
the rainfall.  
General information  
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-  
rectly in front of the interior mirror.  
Safety information  
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity  
of the rain sensor.  
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.  
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.  
NOTICE  
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers  
can accidentally start moving in car washes.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-  
vate the rain sensor in car washes.  
160  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-  
tions.  
Window washer system  
Safety information  
Safety information  
Warning  
Warning  
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window  
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.  
There is a risk of accident. Only use the win-  
dow washer system when the washer fluid  
will not freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-  
freeze, if needed.  
If the wipers start moving in the folded away  
state, body parts can be jammed or damage  
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a  
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off  
when the wipers are in the folded-away state  
and the wipers are folded in when switching  
on.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,  
the washer pump cannot work as intended.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Do  
not use the washer system when the washer  
fluid reservoir is empty.  
NOTICE  
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,  
the wiper blades can be torn off and the  
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost  
the windshield prior to switching the wipers  
on.  
Cleaning the windshield  
Pull the lever.  
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-  
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when  
the wiper moves upward.  
Fold-out position of the wipers  
Principle  
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be  
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-  
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper  
161  
 
 
Light and view  
CONTROLS  
Folding out the wipers  
1. Turn on standby state.  
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until  
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.  
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the  
windshield.  
Folding in the wipers  
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.  
2. Switch on standby state and press and  
hold the wiper lever down again.  
Wipers return to their rest position and are  
ready again for operation.  
162  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Safety  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Vehicle features and options  
Additional information:  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Airbags  
1
Front airbag, driver  
Front airbag, front passenger  
Head airbag  
4
5
Side airbag  
Knee airbag  
2
3
Front airbags  
Side airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
protects the side of the body in the chest and  
lap area.  
The front airbag helps protect the driver and  
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact  
in which the seat belts alone would not provide  
adequate protection.  
Depending on the national-market version:  
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag  
in the rear protects the chest and lap area on  
163  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
the side of the bodies of the occupants in the  
outer rear seats.  
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the  
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low  
as possible when the airbag is deployed.  
Head airbag  
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag  
protects the head.  
▷
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that  
hands can be crossed over the steering  
wheel. Select the settings so that the  
shoulder rests against the backrest when  
crossing the hands and the upper body  
is as far back as possible while still main-  
taining a comfortable grip on the steering  
wheel.  
Ejection Mitigation  
The head airbag system is designed as an  
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce  
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants  
through side windows during rollovers or side  
collision events.  
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-  
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in  
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.  
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads  
away from the side airbag.  
Knee airbag  
Depending on the national-market version:  
There should be no additional persons, an-  
imals or objects between an airbag and a  
person.  
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event  
of a frontal impact.  
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-  
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-  
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not  
attach brackets or cables, for instance for  
navigation devices or mobile phones.  
Protective effect  
General information  
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-  
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.  
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with  
adhesive, do not cover them or modify  
them in any way.  
Information on optimum protective  
effect of the airbags  
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on  
the passenger's side as a storage area.  
Warning  
Keep storage compartments near the air-  
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or  
center armrest.  
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat  
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-  
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the  
airbag system cannot provide protection as  
intended and may cause additional injuries  
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Follow the information on  
achieving the optimum protective effect of the  
airbag system.  
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,  
or other objects on the front seats unless  
they are specifically designed for seats with  
integrated airbags.  
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as  
jackets over the backrests.  
Do not modify individual components or  
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel  
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.  
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.  
Fasten the seat belts correctly.  
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.  
Always grasp the steering wheel on the  
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the  
164  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Even when you follow all instructions very  
closely, injury from contact with the airbags  
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.  
Malfunction  
▷
Warning light does not illuminate  
when drive-ready state is turned on.  
The ignition and inflation noise may lead  
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary  
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.  
▷
The warning light illuminates con-  
tinuously.  
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-  
ers may not be operational. Have the vehicle  
checked immediately by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-  
ities may affect the air bag system; contact  
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-  
tion.  
Warnings and information on the airbags are  
also found on the sun visors.  
Setting the front seat positions  
Operational readiness of the airbag  
system  
The power that deploys the driver's/front  
passenger airbags depends on the position of  
the driver's/front passenger seat.  
Safety information  
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-  
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-  
spective message appears on the control dis-  
play.  
Warning  
Individual components can be hot after de-  
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk  
of injury. Do not touch individual components.  
Additional information:  
Seats, refer to page 97.  
Automatic deactivation of  
the front passenger airbags  
Warning  
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,  
malfunction or unintentional deployment of  
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-  
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as  
intended despite the accident severity. There  
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the  
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-  
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service  
center or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
Principle  
The system reads if the front passenger seat  
is occupied by measuring the human body's  
resistance.  
The front passenger airbags are activated or  
deactivated.  
General information  
Before transporting a child on the front pass-  
enger seat, refer to the safety information and  
instructions for children on the front passenger  
seat, see Children.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
When drive-ready state is turned on,  
the warning light in the instrument  
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-  
cating the operational readiness of the entire  
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.  
165  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
passenger's side are not ac-  
tivated.  
Safety information  
▷
The indicator light does not illuminate  
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-  
son of sufficient size is detected on the  
seat. The airbags on the passenger's side  
are activated.  
Warning  
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-  
tion, the system must be able to detect  
whether a person is sitting in the front pass-  
enger seat. The entire seat surface must be  
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury  
or danger to life. Make sure that the front  
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-  
well.  
Fault of the automatic deactivation  
system  
When transporting older children and adults,  
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-  
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the  
indicator light for the front passenger airbags  
illuminates.  
Functional requirements  
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied  
seat surface:  
In this case, change the seat position so that  
the front passenger airbags are activated and  
the indicator light goes out.  
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats  
or other items to the front passenger seat  
unless they are specifically determined to  
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.  
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have  
the person sit in the rear seat.  
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that  
can press against the seat from below.  
Detected child restraint systems  
Do not place any electronic devices on the  
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-  
tem is to be installed on it.  
The system generally detects children seated  
in a child restraint system, particularly in child  
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the  
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-  
tured. After installing a child restraint system,  
make sure that the indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates  
that the child restraint system has been de-  
tected and the front passenger airbags are not  
activated.  
▷
No moisture in or on the seat.  
Indicator light for the front  
passenger airbags  
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger  
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating  
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.  
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-  
ther activated or deactivated.  
Collision warning systems  
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light  
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether  
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has  
different systems that can help prevent the risk  
of imminent collision.  
▷
The indicator light illuminates  
when a child is properly  
seated in a child restraint  
system or when the seat is  
empty. The airbags on the  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-  
tervention, refer to page 168.  
▷
Lane departure warning, refer to page 175.  
166  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to  
page 178.  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
▷
▷
Side collision mitigation, refer to page 181.  
Additional information:  
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to  
page 182.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
▷
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to  
page 183.  
Turning on/turning off collision  
warning systems  
Depending on national-market version, some  
of the systems are automatically activated  
whenever you start driving.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The following functions are adjustable.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. Select the desired settings.  
Resetting the settings  
The settings of the collision warning systems  
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle  
outbound delivery.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Reset to recommended settings"  
System limits  
Safety information  
Sensors  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-  
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-  
lowing sensors:  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
167  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
▷
▷
Intersection Collision Warning with city  
braking function, refer to page 173.  
Evasion Assistant, refer to page 174.  
Safety information  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
Warning  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Forward Collision Mitigation  
with brake intervention  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help  
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be  
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-  
verity of the accident.  
The system can issue a warning of a possible  
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-  
pendently, if needed.  
Sensors  
Depending on the equipment, the system is  
controlled by the following sensors:  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the For-  
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the  
following functions:  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function, refer to page 171.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-  
fer to page 172.  
168  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Speed range  
The system issues a warning of a possi-  
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Some functions are deactivated earlier.  
The system is enabled as soon as the speed  
drops below these values again.  
The more sensitive the warning time is set to  
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The  
system can therefore also issue more early or  
unfounded warnings and reactions.  
Turning the Forward Collision  
Mitigation on/off  
The system checks for visual impairments. De-  
pending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver  
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster  
captures the driver’s field of vision. Visibility  
and field of vision also affect the timing of the  
warnings.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by setting the warning  
time.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
The following indicator lights and warning  
lights are shown on the instrument cluster and,  
depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-  
up display:  
Additional information:  
Setting the warning time, refer to page 169.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Turning system off manually  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
Depending on national-market version, the ad-  
justment can only be made when the vehicle is  
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.  
Risk of collision, for instance with a  
preceding vehicle.  
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed  
successively on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the right.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"  
7. "Off"  
Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle  
crossing from the left.  
Risk of collision with a vehicle from an  
unrecognizable direction of travel.  
169  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-  
ing lights may display differently if the system  
detects multiple objects.  
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic  
Stability Control activates automatically.  
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient  
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively  
steering.  
Warning function  
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-  
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-  
spective hazardous situation.  
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.  
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light  
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-  
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning  
tone sounds.  
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-  
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,  
only a brief brake intervention will occur.  
In the event of a system warning, the driver  
must intervene immediately and in accordance  
with the situation.  
System limits  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Red warning light illuminates:  
Safety information  
A hazardous situation has been detected.  
Increased awareness is required.  
Warning  
Red warning light flashes:  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
A warning signal sounds:  
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-  
diately.  
Automatic brake intervention:  
Depending on the equipment and situation  
in case of risk of imminent collision, the  
system can also intervene with an auto-  
matic brake intervention and automatically  
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a  
complete stop.  
Detection capability  
The system's detection capability is limited.  
The system only takes into account objects  
that are located in the detection range of the  
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-  
tem.  
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and  
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle  
is used.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.  
Automatic brake intervention  
In case of a risk of collision, the system can  
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if  
necessary.  
Thus, a system response might not come or  
might come late.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,  
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
170  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-  
tions occur less frequently.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
With limitation of the driving stability control  
systems.  
▷
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation  
when towing.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Forward Collision Warning with a de-  
tected vehicle.  
Forward Collision Warning  
with braking function  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Principle  
The Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function is a warning function that notifies the  
driver of a possible risk of collision and brakes  
automatically as necessary.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 168.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
General information  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
or only detected with a delay, for instance:  
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
The system issues a warning of a possible risk  
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-  
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings  
may vary with the current driving situation.  
Upper speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily. As soon as the speed drops below  
this value again, the system is reactivated.  
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-  
dling when responding. If an active driving  
171  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Daytime Pedestrian  
Collision Mitigation  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 168.  
Principle  
The Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is  
a warning function that notifies the driver of a  
possible risk of collision with pedestrians and  
cyclists and brakes automatically as neces-  
sary. The system issues warnings for speeds  
that are common in towns and cities.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Detection range  
General information  
The detection range in front of the vehicle is  
divided into two areas:  
▷
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the  
vehicle.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
▷
Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and  
left of the central area.  
The system issues a warning of a possible  
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at  
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.  
There is a risk of collision if persons, e.g.,  
pedestrians or cyclists, are located within the  
central area. A warning is issued about pedes-  
trians who are located within the extended  
area only if they are moving in the direction of  
the central area.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-  
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.  
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a  
pedestrian.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
172  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The system warns of a possible risk of colli-  
sion with vehicles at speeds above approx.  
6 mph/10 km/h.  
Upper speed limit  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the  
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists  
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
The timing of warnings may vary with the cur-  
rent driving situation.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
Intersection Collision  
Warning with city braking  
function  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.  
Principle  
The Intersection Collision Warning with city  
braking function is a warning function that  
helps prevent accidents with cross traffic at in-  
tersections and junctions. At speeds that are  
common in towns and cities, the system warns  
the driver of a possible risk of collision and  
brakes automatically if necessary.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the right.  
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing  
from the left.  
In the event of an accident, the system helps  
by reducing impact speed.  
Risk of collision with vehicle for which  
the driving direction cannot be deter-  
mined.  
General information  
Warning function  
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 168.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be  
detected by the system as soon as these vehi-  
cles enter into detection range of the sensors.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-  
sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-  
fic is detected.  
▷
Crossing vehicles when they are hidden,  
e.g. by buildings.  
▷
Vehicles with an unusual side view.  
173  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles in highly dynamic driving situa-  
tions.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation is active.  
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
▷
Sensors detect sufficient clearance around  
vehicle.  
Crossing two-wheeled vehicles.  
Speed range  
The Evasion Assistant helps the driver  
when the vehicle speed is between approx.  
19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.  
Upper speed limit  
The system responds to crossing vehicles  
when the vehicle speed is below approx.  
50 mph/80 km/h.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
If there is a risk of collision with a detected  
vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian,  
a warning light is displayed.  
Evasion Assistant  
Principle  
Icon  
Meaning  
The Evasion Assistant can help the driver per-  
form evasive maneuvers in certain situations,  
e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear  
suddenly.  
Warning when a vehicle is detected.  
Risk of collision with a pedestrian.  
General information  
Warning function with evasion  
support  
If the vehicle approaches another object at a  
high differential speed, a warning is displayed  
if there is an immediate risk of collision.  
Intervene in case of a warning.  
The system is designed to provide assistance  
during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk  
of collision.  
The system issues a warning and intervenes  
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-  
neuver is possible.  
System limits  
Sensors monitor and detect the clearance  
around the vehicle.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-  
sion Mitigation" chapter.  
If the system detects sufficient free space  
alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver per-  
form an evasive maneuver safely.  
Detection range  
The following situations may not be detected,  
for instance:  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-  
ward Collision Mitigation”.  
174  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-  
proached at high speed.  
Safety information  
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute  
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-  
ing road and traffic situations. There is a  
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic  
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely  
and actively intervene where appropriate Do  
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a  
warning.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.  
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.  
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.  
Pedestrians that are not detected as such  
because of their contour or posture.  
▷
Pedestrians who are too small for the sen-  
sors to detect.  
Warning  
Lane Departure Warning  
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a  
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.  
Due to its limits, the system may not issue  
warnings or responses, or these may be is-  
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-  
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Principle  
The lane departure warning alerts when the  
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the  
lane.  
General information  
Functional requirement  
The camera must detect the lane boundaries  
for the lane departure warning to be active.  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-  
tection range.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
The system issues a warning starting at a min-  
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-  
specific and displayed on the control display.  
Turning the Lane Departure  
Warning on/off  
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.  
The system does not provide a warning if the  
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-  
fore exiting the lane.  
Turning on the system automatically  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active after every de-  
parture.  
175  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Turning on system manually  
The system is activated by setting the warning  
time.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
Additional information:  
2. "Vehicle"  
Setting the warning time, refer to page 176.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Turning system off manually  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, you must successively confirm  
the switch-off on the control display.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Off"  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
Setting Lane Departure Warning  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
Setting the warning time  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention is automatically active af-  
ter every driving off.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Lane Departure Warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Different system statuses are displayed on  
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle  
equipment and national-market version.  
▷
▷
▷
"Early"  
"Medium"  
"Reduced"  
Some warnings are suppressed de-  
pending on the situation, for instance  
when purposely driving over lane mark-  
ings in curves or with dynamic passing  
without a turn signal.  
176  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
For instance, the steering intervention will be  
suppressed in the following situations:  
Icon  
Meaning  
Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-  
tem is switched on. At least one lane  
boundary has been detected on one  
side of the vehicle. The system is  
ready to intervene and issue warn-  
ings. The system can perform steer-  
ing interventions.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.  
When flashing.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
In driving situation with high driving dynam-  
ics.  
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Indicator light flashes green: System  
is performing a steering intervention.  
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
When actively merging back to your own  
lane after passing.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Warning signal  
Depending on the national-market version: in  
the event of multiple active steering interven-  
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-  
out the driver's intervention at the steering  
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an  
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning  
signal will sound at the second steering inter-  
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-  
vention, a continuous warning will sound.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 146.  
Warning function  
If you leave the lane  
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary  
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates  
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration  
setting.  
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-  
played.  
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-  
responding direction before changing the lane,  
a warning is not issued.  
The warning signal and Check Control mes-  
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.  
End of warning  
For instance, the warning or an active steering  
intervention will be canceled in the following  
situations:  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the equipment and the national-  
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in  
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the  
system intervenes with a brief active steering  
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-  
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle  
within the lane. The steering intervention can  
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be  
manually overridden at any time.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.  
When returning to your own lane.  
With hard accelerating or braking.  
With hazard warning system switched on.  
When flashing.  
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
When steering intervention is active,  
the indicator light flashes green.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
177  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
Immediately following a steering interven-  
tion by the vehicle systems.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives  
warnings at different levels.  
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.  
General information  
When another driver assistance system is  
activated, if applicable.  
▷
▷
No lane boundaries detected.  
When the system limits are reached.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and  
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a  
minimum speed.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection  
menu.  
▷
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
The system indicates whether there are vehi-  
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching  
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The  
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates  
dimly.  
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
Before you change lanes after setting the turn  
signal, the system issues a warning in the  
situations described above. The warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel vibrates.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
When turning at a speed of up to approx.  
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not  
vibrate.  
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Active Blind Spot Detection  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Principle  
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles  
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from  
behind in the adjacent lane.  
178  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the national-market  
version: turning steering intervention  
on/off  
Functional requirement  
The areas of the sensors must be clean and  
clear.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection  
on/off  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
1.  
Apps menu  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. "Steering intervention"  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot  
Detection  
Additional information:  
Setting the warning time  
Assisted View, refer to page 146.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Warning function  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Prewarning  
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror  
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot  
or approaching from the rear.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
179  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Acute warning  
Upper speed limit  
When an acute warning occurs, the steering  
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the  
exterior mirror flashes brightly.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated  
temporarily.  
An acute warning is issued if the following con-  
ditions are met:  
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.  
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.  
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical  
area.  
Displaying warnings  
The number of warnings shown depends on  
how the settings are configured. However,  
there may also be an excess of unwarranted  
warnings of critical situations.  
Your own vehicle is approaching the other  
lane.  
Depending on the system setting when the  
turn signal is turned on.  
The warning stops when the other vehicle has  
left the critical area or the turn signal has been  
turned off.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
Steering intervention  
Depending on the national-market version:  
when there is no response to the vibration  
of the steering wheel at speeds of up to  
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking  
is crossed, the system engages the active  
steering intervention. The steering intervention  
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,  
for instance by stickers.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
steering intervention e.g. in the following situa-  
tions:  
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
The steering intervention is carried out from  
a minimum speed. The minimum speed is dis-  
played on the control display.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
Warning light flashing  
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing  
purposes.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
▷
▷
If the camera is impaired.  
System limits  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited. A yellow warning  
light also illuminates, depending on national-  
market version.  
180  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Sensors  
Side collision mitigation  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Principle  
The side-collision warning helps to avoid an  
impending side collision.  
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
General information  
Turning the side collision warning  
on/off  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Side collision warning"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the  
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum  
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.  
Setting the intensity of the steering  
wheel vibration  
The minimum speed is country-specific and  
displayed on the control display.  
1.  
Apps menu  
If, for example, another vehicle is detected next  
to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision  
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a col-  
lision. For this purpose, the system issues a  
warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mir-  
ror, a Check Control message and a vibrating  
steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering  
intervention is performed by the system.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Vibration intensity"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
The setting is applied to all collision warning  
systems.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Functional requirement  
The camera behind the windshield determines  
the lane boundary positions.  
Additional information:  
The camera must detect the lane markings for  
the side collision mitigation with steering inter-  
vention to be active.  
Assisted View, refer to page 146.  
181  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  
much faster than your own.  
Warning function  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.  
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,  
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-  
daries such as in construction areas.  
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in  
snow, ice, dirt or water.  
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are not white.  
With lane boundaries that are covered by  
objects.  
▷
▷
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns  
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.  
Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-  
ready state using the Start/Stop button.  
Acute warning  
If there is a risk of collision, the warning light  
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering  
wheel starts vibrating.  
A Check Control message may be displayed  
when the system is limited.  
Rear-end collision  
preparation  
A Check Control message is displayed at the  
same time.  
Steering intervention  
Principle  
Depending on the national-market version,  
if necessary, the system engages the active  
steering intervention to prevent a collision and  
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The  
steering intervention can be noticed on the  
steering wheel and can be manually overrid-  
den at any time.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-  
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-  
hind.  
General information  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-  
hicle.  
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a  
certain speed, the system can react as follows:  
182  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning  
flashers will be switched on.  
When the system is triggered, the vehicle is  
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of  
lane keeping.  
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions  
are triggered.  
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-  
tional-market version, the system includes a  
lane change function.  
Safety information  
Follow the safety information in the "Forward  
Collision Mitigation" chapter.  
With lane change function: on motorways or  
motorway-like roads, the system steers the ve-  
hicle to the side of the road or shoulder where  
possible. On other roads or with high traffic  
volume, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in  
the current lane.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the radar sensors  
on the sides and rear.  
Overview  
Turning rear-end collision  
preparation on/off  
Button in the vehicle  
The system is automatically active when the  
vehicle is turned on.  
The system is deactivated when reversing.  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-  
ing systems" chapter.  
Parking brake  
Functional limitations  
This function may be restricted if the speed  
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or  
similar to your own speed.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The Emergency Stop Assistant can be trig-  
gered at speeds of approx. 6 mph/10 km/h  
up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.  
Emergency Stop Assistant  
▷
With lane change function: lane changes  
are executed when the traffic situation al-  
lows.  
Principle  
If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle  
safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to  
bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.  
Triggering the Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
Briefly pull the parking brake switch to  
trigger the Emergency Stop Assistant.  
General information  
The Emergency Stop Assistant is not triggered  
automatically. The system can only be trig-  
gered manually by the occupants.  
183  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
With lane change function: releasing the  
switch may trigger an automatic lane  
change.  
Icon  
Status  
When lane markings are detected,  
the system keeps the vehicle in the  
lane.  
The system will take control of the vehicle  
for a maximum of 2 minutes.  
Lane keeping is briefly interrupted.  
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is switched on.  
An emergency call is triggered when sta-  
tionary, depending on vehicle equipment.  
Lane boundary driven over.  
When lane markings are detected,  
the system keeps the vehicle in the  
lane.  
Canceling Emergency Stop  
Assistant  
The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop As-  
sistant by actively taking control of the vehicle  
throughout the entire process.  
The hands are not grasping the  
steering wheel. The system is still ac-  
tive.  
For instance, the system will be canceled in the  
following situations:  
Warning light illuminates red and  
acoustic signal sounds: Hands not  
grasping steering wheel. Interruption  
of lane keeping is imminent.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
When steering.  
When flashing.  
When depressing the accelerator pedal.  
Warning light illuminates red and  
acoustic signal sounds: lane keeping  
is switched off.  
When switching off the hazard warning sys-  
tem.  
▷
▷
When canceling the Emergency Request.  
When switching the selector lever position  
at a standstill.  
System limits  
Use the system only in the event of a driver  
failure.  
▷
The parking brake switch is pressed.  
The system cannot replace the roadworthy  
driving performance of a driver.  
At standstill  
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-  
tem will carry out the following settings:  
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  
The interior lights are switched on.  
Cross Traffic Warning  
Principle  
The central locking system is unlocked.  
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of  
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-  
proaching from the side are detected sooner  
by the cross traffic warning than is possible  
from the driver's seat.  
Display in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Status  
Emergency Stop Assistant is trig-  
gered.  
Without lane change function:  
184  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
General information  
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic  
Warning  
The system must be activated on the control  
display for the Cross Traffic Warning to switch  
on automatically.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by  
sensors.  
6. Depending on the equipment, select the  
following setting:  
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area  
around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is  
monitored as well.  
▷
▷
"Rear warning"  
"Front and rear warning"  
The system indicates approaching road users.  
Turning on the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
The system must be activated on the control  
display. The system turns on automatically as  
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera  
view activates and you engage a gear position.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is  
switched on.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Depending on the equipment, the front system  
is turned on when a gear position is engaged.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system is automatically active when the vehi-  
cle is started.  
Turning off the cross traffic warning  
automatically  
The system is automatically turned off in the  
following situations:  
Sensors  
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
When a certain distance covered is ex-  
ceeded.  
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Depending on the equipment: radar sen-  
sors, side, front.  
185  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Depending on vehicle equipment: display in  
camera image  
Warning function  
General information  
The control display shows the corresponding  
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-  
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-  
ror flashes.  
In case of a brake intervention, a message is  
displayed on the control display and close after  
a brief period of time.  
Visual warning  
Depending on the direction of travel, the view  
to the front or back is displayed in the camera  
image.  
Warning light in exterior mirror  
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the  
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-  
tected by the sensors.  
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your  
own vehicle.  
Acoustic warning  
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone  
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-  
spective direction.  
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes  
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when  
the vehicle is reversing.  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
signal tone will already sound when the gear  
position is engaged.  
Display in the Park Distance Control view  
System limits  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Functional limitations  
The function can be limited, for instance in the  
following situations:  
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-  
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are  
detected by the sensors.  
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow  
or a very fast speed.  
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in  
the capture range of the sensors.  
186  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed  
about the system. In addition, information  
about the system is required when handing off  
the vehicle.  
BMW Drive Recorder  
Principle  
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video  
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to  
document surrounding traffic.  
Functional requirements  
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
General information  
Video recordings can be saved in different  
ways:  
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.  
Privacy Policy was accepted.  
Recording type was selected.  
Recording time was selected.  
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.  
The function makes it possible to document  
the accident with the correspondingly set  
recording type.  
Activating/deactivating the BMW  
Drive Recorder  
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated  
before the first use of the recording function.  
▷
Manual storage of the recording.  
This function is used to document traffic sit-  
uations with the configured recording type.  
1.  
Apps menu  
The assistance systems' cameras are used to  
record, e.g., Panorama View.  
2. "All apps"  
Additionally, the following parameters are  
stored for the trip:  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. Accept Privacy Policy.  
5. "Settings"  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.  
Time.  
6. "Allow recording"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Vehicle speed.  
Global Positioning System coordinates.  
Recording functions  
Data protection  
Automatic recording  
Recordings are saved automatically when the  
vehicle sensors detect an accident.  
The permissibility of recording and using video  
recordings is contingent upon the statutory  
regulations of the country in which the system  
is to be used. The user is responsible for the  
use of the system and compliance with respec-  
tive applicable regulations.  
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic  
recording may be taken.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory  
constraints on use of the system in your state  
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,  
the laws with respect to use of the system  
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-  
cially when borders are frequently crossed.  
187  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
If a camera change occurred during the record-  
ing, different segments of the video can be se-  
lected.  
Manual recording  
Using the button  
Settings  
Recording type  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Press and hold this button.  
Recording time  
1.  
Apps menu  
Via iDrive  
2. "All apps"  
Start the recording:  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "All apps"  
5. Select the desired setting.  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recording"  
Cameras  
Different cameras can be selected.  
5. "Start recording"  
1.  
Apps menu  
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-  
onds before and after storage is triggered.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Settings"  
Recording playback and  
administration  
Stored video recordings can be played back,  
exported and deleted.  
5. "Cam. selection"  
6. Select desired camera.  
"All": In the event of an accident, the system  
switches automatically.  
For your own safety, the video recording is  
only displayed on the control display up to ap-  
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market  
versions, the video recording is only displayed  
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-  
tor lever is in the P position.  
If driver assistance systems are enabled, their  
camera views are automatically selected.  
System limits  
1.  
Apps menu  
In the event of serious accidents, it may not  
be possible to store recordings if the damage  
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply  
was interrupted.  
2. "All apps"  
3. "Drive Recorder"  
4. "Recordings"  
If you repeatedly overwrite a USB drive, it may  
not be possible to export recordings correctly.  
5. Select desired recording.  
188  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
The preferred file system for USB storage is  
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.  
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and  
actively intervene where appropriate  
Active Protection  
Function  
Depending on the equipment and require-  
ments, the following individual functions are  
active in accident-critical driving situations:  
Principle  
Active Protection prepares occupants and the  
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving  
or collision situations.  
▷
▷
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.  
The windows remain open with a small  
gap.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, Active Protection consists of  
various PreCrash functions.  
The glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof  
closes automatically.  
The sun protection is also closed.  
Automatic positioning of the backrest for  
the front passenger seat.  
The system is used to detect certain critical  
driving situations that might lead to an acci-  
dent. This includes the following critical driving  
situations:  
Systems can be returned to the desired set-  
tings following a critical driving situation with-  
out accident.  
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.  
Severe understeering.  
Severe oversteering.  
PostCrash iBrake  
Certain functions of several systems can,  
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-  
tion triggering:  
Principle  
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash  
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a  
standstill without intervention by the driver.  
▷
▷
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function: automatic brake intervention.  
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function: brake booster.  
General information  
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a  
further collision and its consequences.  
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of  
impending rear-end collisions.  
At standstill  
After coming to a halt, the brake is released  
automatically.  
Safety information  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, critical situations might not be  
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk  
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-  
Harder vehicle deceleration  
In certain situations, it may be necessary to  
bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than  
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake.  
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the  
brake. The brake pressure will then be higher  
189  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
than the brake pressure generated by auto-  
matic braking. Automatic braking with Post-  
Crash iBrake is canceled.  
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-  
ing criteria into account:  
▷
▷
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering  
behavior.  
Abort automatic braking  
It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash  
iBrake automatic braking in certain situations,  
e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.  
Driving conditions, for instance time, length  
of trip.  
Depending on the equipment: attention  
of the driver through the Driver Attention  
Camera.  
Abort automatic braking:  
▷
By depressing the brake pedal for slightly  
longer.  
The system is active starting at ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a  
break recommendation.  
▷
By pressing the accelerator pedal for  
slightly longer.  
Setting break recommendation  
The break recommendation can be switched  
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.  
Fatigue alert  
1.  
Apps menu  
Principle  
2. "Vehicle"  
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-  
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued or  
less alert during long, monotonous trips, for in-  
stance on highways. The system recommends  
a break.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Fatigue Alert"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
Despite this function being off, some driver as-  
sistance systems may issue break recommen-  
dations.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
one's physical state. An increasing lack of  
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or  
not be detected in time. There is a risk of  
accident, injury, or property damage. Make  
sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust  
driving style to traffic conditions.  
Display  
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,  
a message is displayed in the control display  
with the recommendation to take a break.  
During the display, various settings can be se-  
lected.  
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after  
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation  
can only be displayed again after this time has  
elapsed.  
Break recommendation  
Function  
System limits  
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If  
the system is limited, either no warning may  
After starting the trip, the system is trained to  
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-  
gue can be detected.  
190  
 
 
Safety  
CONTROLS  
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be  
issued.  
sources. Depending on the light conditions,  
these light sources can be visible when the  
vehicle is in standby mode.  
The break recommendation function may be  
limited in the following situations:  
System limits  
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully  
operational in the following situations:  
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.  
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-  
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.  
▷
When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-  
ered by the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during  
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.  
▷
With sunglasses with high protection from  
infrared light.  
In active driving situations such as when  
changing lanes frequently.  
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.  
In the event of strong side winds.  
Driver Attention Camera  
Principle  
A camera in the instrument cluster monitors  
the driver’s activity and, depending on the  
equipment, the driver’s viewing direction.  
General information  
The assistance systems help drivers by ana-  
lyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g.,  
by evaluating their head position and eyes.  
For full operability, make sure that the field of  
view of the Driver Attention Camera is not ob-  
structed.  
Overview  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-  
ment cluster may have some infrared light  
191  
 
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Driving stability control systems  
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
The brake assistant automatically applies  
maximum braking assistance when the brake  
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the  
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.  
Additional information:  
To make full use of braking assistance, do not  
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during  
full braking.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Antilock Braking System  
Drive-off assistant  
Principle  
Principle  
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking  
of the wheels during the braking process.  
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on  
uphill grades.  
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-  
ing full braking, which increases active driving  
safety.  
Driving off  
1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake  
pedal.  
General information  
The Antilock Braking System is ready after  
each time drive-ready state is turned on.  
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off  
quickly.  
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is  
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.  
Malfunction  
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle  
may roll back slightly.  
The warning light on the instrument  
cluster illuminates.  
In order to prevent rolling back when driving  
off, use the parking brake.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-  
ble.  
1.  
Pull and release switch before driv-  
ing off.  
Steerability is limited during full braking.  
The parking brake is set.  
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to  
drive off.  
192  
 
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Overview  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Button in the vehicle  
Principle  
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-  
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-  
tions. The drive power is reduced depending  
on the situation, and wheels can be braked  
individually.  
General information  
The system detects the following unstable  
driving conditions, for instance:  
Dynamic Stability Control  
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.  
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which  
can lead to understeering.  
Activating/deactivating Dynamic  
Stability Control  
Safety information  
General information  
Warning  
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-  
vated whenever drive-ready state is switched  
on.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-  
ing stability is limited when accelerating and  
cornering.  
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic  
Stability Control as soon as possible.  
Activating/deactivating the system  
1.  
Press the button to open the menu.  
Warning  
2. "DSC OFF"  
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,  
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This  
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-  
ical driving situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Drive with  
roof load only with activated Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control.  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
193  
 
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-  
ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
View when Dynamic Stability  
Control is deactivated.  
General information  
The vehicle has maximum traction when Dy-  
namic Traction Control is on. Driving stability  
is limited during acceleration and when corner-  
ing.  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Stability Control is deactivated.  
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-  
trol may be useful in the following situations:  
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-  
ity Control is regulating the driving and  
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.  
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to  
the driving circumstances.  
▷
▷
▷
When driving in slush or on uncleared,  
snow-covered roads.  
When driving off from deep snow or loose  
ground.  
When driving with snow chains.  
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control has failed or is initializing.  
Driving stabilization is restricted or has  
failed.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
If the warning light illuminates continuously,  
have the vehicle checked immediately by an  
authorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
Automatic program change  
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated au-  
tomatically by Forward Collision Mitigation de-  
pending on the situation. Deactivate Forward  
Collision Mitigation as necessary.  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention, refer to page 168.  
Activating/deactivating the Dynamic  
Traction Control  
Dynamic Traction Control  
1.  
Press the button to open the menu.  
Principle  
2. "Traction"  
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of  
the Dynamic Stability Control where the drive  
power is optimized.  
Dynamic Traction Control is activated and  
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.  
The system ensures maximum drive power  
on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-  
3.  
Press the button again to reactivate  
Dynamic Stability Control.  
194  
 
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
M sport differential  
View when Dynamic Traction  
Control is activated.  
The M Sport differential provides for continu-  
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-  
tial, depending on the driving situation. This  
prevents spinning of a single rear wheel and  
thereby provides optimal traction in any driving  
situation.  
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic  
Traction Control is activated.  
The driver is responsible adapting his or her  
driving style to the situation.  
Automatic program change  
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control  
is activated automatically:  
Servotronic  
▷
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control  
is activated.  
Principle  
Servotronic is a speed-dependent steering  
support.  
▷
In case of a brake intervention by For-  
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-  
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.  
The system provides the steering force with  
more support at low speeds than at higher  
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,  
and makes steering firmer when driving at  
faster speeds.  
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.  
The vehicle has a flat tire.  
Additional information:  
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-  
vention, refer to page 168.  
Setting  
The steering force adapts to the drive mode  
to convey a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable  
steering response.  
BMW xDrive  
Principle  
Variable sport steering  
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of  
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW  
xDrive and other suspension control systems  
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-  
mizes traction and driving dynamics.  
The variable sports steering facilitates direct  
and agile handling with little steering effort.  
The variable sports steering responds inde-  
pendently of the current speed, varying the  
steering gear ratio in line with the steering an-  
gle.  
General information  
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive  
forces to the front and rear axles as required  
by the driving situation and road conditions.  
▷
In situations that require large movements  
of the steering wheel, e.g., when maneu-  
vering or turning, even minor movements of  
the steering wheel will result in a greater  
wheel steering angle. As a result, the varia-  
ble sports steering increases steering com-  
195  
 
 
Driving stability control systems  
CONTROLS  
fort by reducing the necessary steering ef-  
fort.  
▷
The wheel angle is reduced in situations  
that require minor or rapid corrections of  
the direction of travel when driving at higher  
speeds, e.g., swerving quickly or correcting  
for crosswinds. In these cases, the variable  
sports steering increases driving stability  
when moving the steering wheel.  
196  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Driver assistance systems  
6. "Speed warning"  
Vehicle features and options  
7. "Warning above:"  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
8. Select the desired setting.  
Applying current speed as the  
speed warning  
Additional information:  
1.  
Apps menu  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Speed warning"  
7. "Adopt current speed"  
Speed warning  
Principle  
The speed warning can be used to set a speed  
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed  
limit is exceeded.  
Speed Limit Info  
General information  
Another warning occurs when the set speed  
limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by  
3 mph/5 km/h.  
Speed Limit Info  
Principle  
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid  
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if  
necessary, the Head-up display.  
Activating/deactivating the speed  
warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
General information  
2. "Vehicle"  
The camera in the area of the interior mirror  
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as  
well as overhead sign posts.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
6. "Speed warning"  
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered  
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.  
The traffic sign will then be either displayed  
or ignored depending on the situation in the  
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.  
Adjusting the speed  
1.  
Apps menu  
The system may also show speed limits that  
apply to routes that are not signposted if the  
navigation system has current map data.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Safety and warnings"  
197  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-  
rent map data for the country in which the ve-  
hicle is operated must be downloaded.  
Display  
Speed Limit Info  
For information on the current map version  
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-  
igation system chapter.  
Icon  
Description  
Current speed limit.  
Without map data, the system is subject to  
certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with  
speed limitations are detected and displayed  
only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities,  
highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed  
limits with extra traffic signs are always dis-  
played.  
Depending on the national-  
market version, it is possible  
to switch between the units of  
measurement.  
No data on current speed limit  
available.  
Additional information:  
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-  
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.  
Speed Limit Info not available.  
Safety information  
Warning signals  
Depending on the settings, an acoustic signal  
sounds if the detected speed limit is exceeded  
or the speed limit changes. The display also  
flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Settings  
Individual settings can be configured for Speed  
Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is  
exceeded or the permissible maximum speed  
changes.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by a camera behind  
the windshield.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
198  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
System limits  
General information  
The system can limit the speed, starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven  
at any speed below the set speed limit.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
Camera, refer to page 37.  
Overview  
Functional limitations  
The system function may be limited and may  
provide incorrect information in the following  
situations:  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
System on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed  
by objects, stickers, or paint.  
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-  
ard.  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
In areas that are not included in the naviga-  
tion system map data.  
If navigation system map data is invalid,  
outdated, or unavailable.  
Rocker switch:  
Changing the speed limit.  
When roads deviate from the navigation  
such as due to changes in road layout.  
Operation  
When driving very close to the vehicle in  
front of you.  
Turning on the speed limiter  
When passing buses or trucks with traffic  
signs applied to them.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.  
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-  
lel road are detected.  
The current speed is adopted as the speed  
limit.  
▷
In the presence of country-specific road  
signs or road layouts.  
If the system is turned on while the vehi-  
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds,  
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.  
The marking in the speedometer is set to the  
corresponding speed.  
Manual Speed Limiter  
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic  
Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle  
may change to COMFORT drive mode.  
Principle  
The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set  
a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-  
cle from exceeding speed limits.  
Turning off the speed limiter  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
199  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The system switches off automatically in the  
following situations, for example:  
Exceeding the speed limit  
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed  
limit, a warning is issued.  
▷
▷
▷
When the engine is switched off.  
When Cruise Control is switched on.  
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.  
When certain driving modes are activated  
via Driving Experience Control.  
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down  
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.  
The displays turn off.  
When the vehicle speed drops below the set  
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-  
vated.  
Stopping the speed limiter  
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the  
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.  
Warning when the speed limit is  
exceeded  
Changing the speed limit  
Visual warning  
If the speed limit is exceeded: the  
indicator light in the instrument clus-  
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is  
greater than the set speed limit.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-  
ally, a signal sounds.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed limit is set.  
▷
When the speed limit is reduced to be-  
low the current vehicle speed, the signal  
sounds after some time.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-  
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
▷
When the speed limit is intentionally ex-  
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator  
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-  
ally exceeded such as when driving downhill,  
the vehicle is not actively braked.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
When the speed limit is set during a trip to  
a value below the current speed, the vehicle  
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.  
▷
▷
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive.  
The current speed can also be stored by  
pressing a button:  
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted.  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
No marking: system is  
switched off.  
200  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Indicator light  
Icon  
Description  
The indicator light illuminates: the  
system is switched on.  
Warning  
The use of the system can lead to an in-  
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-  
uations, for instance:  
The indicator light flashes: the set  
speed limit has been exceeded.  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.  
With high traffic volume.  
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet  
conditions, or on a loose road surface.  
Cruise Control without  
Distance Control  
There is a risk of accident, injury, or property  
damage. Only use the system if driving at  
constant speed is possible.  
Principle  
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-  
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-  
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as  
needed.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
General information  
The system can be activated starting at  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions. For instance, acceleration can  
change depending on the driving mode.  
Overview  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Safety information  
Cruise control on/off.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Interrupt cruise control.  
201  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Stopping the system automatically  
Button Function  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations, for example:  
Store current speed.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled  
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Turning Cruise Control on/off  
Turning on the system  
Adjusting the speed  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted.  
Turning off the system  
When the system is switched on, the current  
speed is maintained and stored as the set  
speed.  
Depending on the equipment version,  
press the relevant button on the steer-  
ing wheel.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
Interrupting Cruise Control  
Press the button.  
Stopping the system manually  
When active, press the button.  
202  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Changing the speed  
Press the button with the system inter-  
rupted.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
The maximum speed that can be set de-  
pends on the vehicle.  
▷
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance  
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or  
decelerates without pressure on the accel-  
erator pedal.  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-  
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the  
switch beyond the resistance point causes  
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.  
Indicator light  
Icon  
Description  
Continuing cruise control  
No indicator light: system is switched  
off.  
Warning  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
203  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Otherwise, drive off on your own such as by  
pressing the accelerator pedal or the rocker  
switch on the steering wheel.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise  
control settings may change under certain  
conditions. For instance, acceleration can  
change depending on the driving mode.  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
System limits  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
Safety information  
Warning  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may  
exceed or drop below the set desired speed  
in some situations, for instance on downhill or  
uphill grades.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Do not use Cruise Control when towing.  
Active Cruise Control with  
Distance Control  
Principle  
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and  
a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted  
using the buttons on the steering wheel.  
Warning  
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and  
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Before leaving  
the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling  
away.  
General information  
The system maintains the set speed on clear  
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-  
matically.  
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured  
against rolling away, follow the following:  
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system  
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set  
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.  
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-  
uation allows.  
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.  
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
turn the front wheels in the direction of  
the curb.  
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,  
also secure the vehicle, for instance with  
a wheel chock.  
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.  
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-  
tive speed.  
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-  
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-  
riod, the system is able to detect this within the  
given system limits.  
204  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Button Function  
With Steering Assistant:  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Interrupt cruise control.  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Without Steering Assistant:  
Continue cruise control with the last  
setting.  
Without Steering Assistant:  
Interrupt cruise control.  
Warning  
Risk of accident is greater when there is a  
high speed differential to other vehicles, for  
instance in the following situations:  
Increase the distance.  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-  
hicle at speed.  
Reduce distance.  
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own  
lane.  
Switch Distance Control on/off.  
When approaching stationary vehicles at  
speed.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed.  
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively  
intervene where appropriate  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Overview  
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
Front radar sensor.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
With Steering Assistant:  
Cruise control on/off.  
Application range  
The system is best used on well-maintained  
roads.  
With Steering Assistant:  
Select function.  
The minimum speed that can be set is  
20 mph/30 km/h.  
Without Steering Assistant:  
Cruise control on/off.  
The maximum speed that can be set is limited  
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and  
the vehicle equipment.  
Store current speed.  
The system can also be activated when sta-  
tionary.  
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-  
gested speed manually.  
Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control  
when towing.  
205  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster  
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is  
set to the current speed.  
Turning Cruise Control on/off or  
stopping it  
Cruise control is active. The current speed is  
maintained and stored as desired speed.  
With Steering Assistant: Assisted  
Driving Mode  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
General information  
This button is used to switch the con-  
figured function on and off.  
Turning off the system  
To switch off the system while stationary, step  
on brake pedal at the same time.  
The button can be used to set the pri-  
marily used function.  
Press the button on the steering wheel:  
With Steering Assistant.  
Setting the function  
When the system is active, press the  
button repeatedly until the desired  
Without Steering Assistant.  
function is selected in the toolbar. The  
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed  
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.  
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is  
deleted.  
Icon  
Function  
Stopping the system manually  
When active, press the button on the steering  
wheel:  
Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
With Steering Assistant.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
and Steering Assistant.  
Without Steering Assistant.  
The selected function is shown in green.  
If interrupting the system while stationary,  
press on the brake pedal at the same time.  
Turning on the system  
With Steering Assistant:  
Stopping the system automatically  
The system is automatically interrupted in the  
following situations:  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
wheel.  
▷
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
2.  
If necessary, set the cruise control.  
▷
▷
Selector lever position D is disengaged.  
Without Steering Assistant:  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled  
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.  
206  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates  
driving stability.  
Changing the speed  
When the vehicle is stationary, the seat  
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is  
opened.  
▷
The system has not detected objects for  
an extended period, for instance on a  
road with very little traffic without curb or  
shoulder markings.  
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-  
paired, for instance by contamination or  
heavy precipitation.  
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  
until the desired speed is set.  
After a longer stationary period when the  
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the  
system.  
If active, the displayed speed is stored and  
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the  
road is clear.  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the  
resistance point, the set speed increases or  
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.  
Adjusting the speed  
Maintaining and storing the speed  
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed  
past the resistance point, the desired speed  
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.  
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the  
action.  
Adjusting the distance  
Safety information  
Press the rocker switch up or down once while  
the system is interrupted. The system will be  
activated.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the  
system limits, deceleration can be late. There  
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-  
age to property. Be aware of the surround-  
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the  
distance to the traffic and weather conditions  
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,  
possibly by braking.  
The current speed is maintained and stored as  
desired speed.  
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-  
ometer.  
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will  
be turned on.  
The speed can also be stored by pressing a  
button.  
Press the button.  
207  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
between the current speed and the stored  
speed should be as little as possible.  
Reducing the distance  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
Press the button on the steering wheel with  
the system interrupted:  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
With Steering Assistant.  
Increasing the distance  
Without Steering Assistant.  
Press the button repeatedly until the  
desired distance is set.  
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-  
ues.  
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-  
tance.  
In the following cases, the stored speed value  
is deleted and cannot be called up again:  
Automatic adaptation of the distance  
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version: the system can be set so that  
the distance to the vehicle in front is automati-  
cally adjusted within the set distance. The sys-  
tem takes into account the traffic situation and  
ambient conditions, e.g. poor visibility.  
When drive-ready state is switched off.  
Changing between Cruise Control  
with/without Distance Control  
Safety information  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Warning  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
The system does not react to traffic driv-  
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the  
stored speed. There is a risk of accident,  
injury, or property damage. Adjust the set  
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as  
needed.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. "Situational distance control"  
Continuing cruise control  
Changing over the Cruise Control mode  
Switching Cruise Control without Distance  
Control off and on:  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
▷
Press and hold this button.  
Press and hold this button.  
▷
With Steering Assistant: switch on Distance  
Control:  
An interrupted cruise control can be continued  
by calling up the stored speed. The difference  
208  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Press the button.  
Icon  
Description  
White indicator light:  
Without Steering Assistant: switch on Distance  
Control:  
No Distance Control because acceler-  
ator pedal is being pressed.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
▷
Press the button.  
Vehicle has been detected ahead of  
you.  
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle  
has been detected ahead of you.  
▷
Press the button.  
After changing, a Check Control message is  
displayed.  
Indicator light flashes green:  
Preceding vehicle has driven off.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
System interrupted.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-  
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.  
Indicator light flashes gray:  
Conditions are not adequate for the  
system to work.  
Display in the speedometer  
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the  
speedometer displays the status of the sys-  
tem.  
The system was deactivated but ap-  
plies the brakes until you actively  
resume control by pressing on the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.  
▷
Green marking: system is ac-  
tive, the marking indicates  
the desired speed.  
Warning light flashes red and acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
▷
Gray marking: system is in-  
terrupted, the marking indi-  
cates the stored speed.  
Brake and make an evasive maneu-  
ver, if necessary.  
▷
No marking: system is switched off.  
Assisted View  
Depending on the equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View in the central  
display area of the instrument cluster.  
Indicator lights and warning lights  
Depending on the equipment:  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 146.  
Displays in the Head-up display  
Set speed  
Some system information can also be dis-  
played in the Head-up display.  
209  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The icon is displayed when the set  
speed is reached.  
Deceleration  
The system does not decelerate in the follow-  
ing situations:  
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving  
road users.  
Distance information  
The icon is displayed when the dis-  
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead  
is too short.  
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and  
national availability, for red traffic lights.  
▷
▷
For cross traffic.  
The distance information is active in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
For oncoming traffic.  
▷
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control  
switched off.  
Merging vehicles  
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.  
Head-up display, refer to page 131.  
Distance too short.  
▷
▷
Speed greater than approx.  
40 mph/70 km/h.  
System limits  
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  
merges into your lane, the system may not be  
able to automatically restore the selected dis-  
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-  
lected distance in certain situations, including if  
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles  
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly  
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving  
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system  
requests that the driver intervene by braking  
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 37.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 38.  
Detection range  
The detection capability of the system and the  
automatic braking performance are limited.  
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be  
detected.  
210  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Cornering  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.  
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
When the set speed is too high for a curve,  
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves  
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a  
curve at an appropriate speed.  
Drive power  
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The  
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades  
if the drive power is insufficient.  
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-  
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-  
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be  
detected very late.  
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may  
exceed or drop below the set desired speed  
in some situations, for instance on downhill or  
uphill grades.  
Speed Limit Assistant  
Principle  
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the  
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-  
plied.  
When you approach a curve the system may  
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due  
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-  
erates you may compensate for it by briefly  
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator  
pedal the system is reactivated and controls  
speed independently.  
General information  
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed  
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,  
this new speed value can be applied for the  
following systems:  
▷
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.  
Cruise control.  
Driving off  
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off  
automatically; for example:  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
The speed value is suggested as the new de-  
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed  
value, the corresponding system must be acti-  
vated.  
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.  
In front of bumps in the road.  
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.  
211  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
5. "Driving"  
Safety information  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. "Speed limits"  
Warning  
8. Select the desired setting:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits  
can be applied manually.  
▷
"Show anticipation": Depending on the  
national-market version: current and up-  
coming speed limits are displayed in  
the instrument cluster without being ap-  
plied.  
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-  
its are displayed without being applied  
in the instrument cluster.  
"Off": depending on the national-market  
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed  
Limit Assistant will be turned off.  
Warning  
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or  
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust the  
set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch sur-  
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene  
where appropriate  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-  
ter when the system and a driver assistance  
system are activated.  
Icon  
Function  
Overview  
Depending on the equipment version,  
the indicator light illuminates green,  
together with the icon for a speed  
control system:  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Speed Limit Assistant is active and  
detected speed limits can be applied  
manually for the displayed system.  
Accept suggested speed manually.  
Detected change of a speed limit with  
immediate effect.  
Rocker switch:  
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.  
Depending on the national-market  
version, it is possible to switch be-  
tween the units of measurement.  
Turning Speed Limit Assistant  
on/off  
Indicator light illuminates green: the  
detected speed limit can be applied  
with the SET button.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
After it has been applied, a green  
checkmark is displayed.  
212  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Manual adoption  
Adapting to route  
A detected speed limit can be applied man-  
ually for the active driver assistance system.  
Principle  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system can be configured so that the vehicle  
adapts the speed automatically to the route.  
When the SET icon illuminates, press  
the button.  
For instance, the speed will be reduced in the  
following situations, if necessary:  
Speed adjustment  
▷
▷
▷
Before making turns.  
Before a roundabout.  
Before a curve.  
Principle  
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is  
applied exactly or with a tolerance.  
Adapting speed automatically to route  
General information  
You can configure a speed adaptation for all  
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-  
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-  
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or  
deactivated.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust  
speed to route"  
Setting the speed adjustment  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
System limits  
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed  
Limit Info system.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.  
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"  
7. Select the desired setting:  
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to  
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
The system does not react or reacts to a lim-  
ited extent to the route ahead in the following  
situations:  
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for  
the speed adaptation that affects all  
speeds.  
▷
If the vehicle location cannot be clearly de-  
termined by the navigation system.  
▷
▷
"2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti-  
vate additional speed adaptation.  
▷
With wintry road conditions.  
"Adjust speed limits": With additional  
speed adjustment activated, set the  
tolerance for speed limits up to  
40 mph/60 km/h.  
Additional information:  
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Information,  
refer to page 199.  
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to  
page 37.  
213  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Sensors  
Steering Assistant  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Principle  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.  
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle  
in the lane. For this purpose, the system ex-  
ecutes supporting steering movements, for in-  
stance when cornering.  
Front radar sensor.  
Radar sensors, side, front.  
Radar sensors, side, rear.  
Additional information:  
General information  
Depending on the speed, the system orients  
itself according to the lane boundaries or vehi-  
cles in front.  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.  
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether  
the steering wheel is being touched.  
Sufficient lane width.  
Above approx. 43 mph/70 km/h: lane  
boundary on both sides is detected.  
Safety information  
▷
Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane  
boundary on both sides or vehicle driving  
ahead is detected.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Hands on the steering wheel rim.  
Wide curves.  
Drive in the center of the lane.  
Turn signal switched off.  
The sensor system calibration process is  
complete.  
▷
▷
▷
Cruise Control with Distance Control active.  
Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.  
Forward Collision Warning with braking  
function on.  
Overview  
▷
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation on.  
Side Collision Warning active.  
Buttons on the steering wheel  
Button Function  
Turning Steering Assistant on/off  
Assisted Driving Mode  
Steering Assistant with Traffic Jam  
Assistant on/off.  
General information  
Switch function on.  
This button is used to switch the con-  
figured function on and off.  
214  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
The button can be used to set the pri-  
marily used function.  
Turning off the system  
Press the button on the steering wheel.  
Setting the function  
The indicator goes out.  
When the system is active, press the  
button repeatedly until the desired  
function is selected in the toolbar. The  
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed  
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.  
The system does not perform supportive  
steering wheel movements.  
Stopping Steering Assistant  
automatically  
The system interrupts the supporting steering  
movements automatically, for example in the  
following situations:  
Icon  
Function  
Cruise Control with Distance Control.  
▷
▷
▷
At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.  
When the steering wheel is released.  
Cruise Control with Distance Control  
and Steering Assistant.  
When performing a manual braking proc-  
ess.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
With strong steering intervention.  
When leaving own lane.  
The selected function is shown in green.  
Turning on the system  
When the turn signal is switched on.  
When the lane is too narrow.  
1.  
Press the button on the steering  
If a lane boundary is not detected for a cer-  
tain period of time and no vehicle is driving  
ahead.  
wheel.  
▷
▷
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control  
is stopped.  
2.  
Adjust the Steering Assistant if nec-  
essary.  
The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-  
tened.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
Indicator light illuminates gray.  
The system is on standby and does not  
manipulate steering movements.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
System activates automatically as soon as all  
function conditions are fulfilled.  
The indicator light illuminates green.  
The system is active.  
With the system switched on, the Daytime Pe-  
destrian Collision Mitigation system and the  
Side Collision Warning are activated.  
215  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Additional information:  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Assisted View, refer to page 146.  
Icon  
Description  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Indicator light illuminates gray:  
The system is ready.  
Indicator light illuminates green:  
The system is activated.  
The system supports the driver in  
keeping the vehicle within the lane.  
Warning light flashes yellow:  
A lane boundary has been crossed.  
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-  
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-  
ment cluster:  
The steering wheel vibrates where  
applicable.  
Warning light illuminates yellow and  
acoustic signal may sound:  
▷
▷
Yellow: system interruption is imminent.  
Red: system will be deactivated.  
System interruption is imminent.  
The steering wheel displays can be switched  
on/off if required.  
Depending on national-market ver-  
sion: The warning light flashes or illu-  
minates red. A signal sounds:  
1.  
Apps menu  
The system is switched off.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"  
6. "Light elements"  
Warning light illuminates yellow:  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. The system is still active.  
Warning light illuminates red, acous-  
tic signal sounds:  
Displays in the Head-up display  
All system information can also be displayed in  
the Head-up display.  
Hands are not grasping the steering  
wheel. System interruption is immi-  
nent.  
The system reduces the speed to a  
standstill if applicable.  
System limits  
It is possible that the system will  
not execute any supporting steering  
movements.  
General information  
The system cannot be activated or meaning-  
fully used in certain situations, e.g., while tow-  
ing a trailer.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
216  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-  
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-  
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering  
or making an evasive maneuver.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus  
Principle  
Assisted Driving Mode Plus helps drivers guide  
their vehicle through traffic jams.  
Supporting steering movements take place  
without the driver actively steering.  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
General information  
The system uses the sensors of the Steering  
Assistant.  
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 37.  
Radar sensors, refer to page 38.  
Safety information  
Hands on the steering wheel  
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering  
wheel contact in the following situations:  
Warning  
▷
▷
Driving with gloves.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Protective covers on the steering wheel.  
Narrow lanes  
When driving within narrow lanes, the system  
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in-  
stance in the following situations:  
▷
▷
In construction areas.  
Depending on the equipment, with auto-  
matic formation of emergency lanes.  
Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and  
the use of this function may be prohibited or  
limited. Before use, check federal, state, and  
local laws.  
▷
Within city limits.  
Weather  
The following restrictions can occur under un-  
favorable weather or light conditions:  
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-  
tant apply.  
▷
Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane  
boundaries.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
▷
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that  
are already recognized.  
217  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Depending on vehicle equipment, this function  
can be enabled/disabled on the control dis-  
play.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering  
Assistant are fulfilled.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Functional requirements, refer to page 214.  
The Steering Assistant is active.  
2. "Vehicle"  
▷
▷
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
The function is only available on certain  
street types, e.g. freeways.  
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or  
cyclists.  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"  
▷
▷
Sufficient lane width.  
Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead  
are detected.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
▷
▷
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.  
Icon  
Description  
The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-  
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-  
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.  
Indicator light green: system is active.  
▷
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
Indicator light white: system is ready.  
Switching on Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus  
Gray indicator light: the system has  
been interrupted.  
As soon as all functional requirements  
are met, an additional icon for Assisted  
Driving Mode Plus will be displayed on  
the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at  
the bottom of the instrument cluster.  
Displays on the steering wheel  
Select Assisted Driving Mode Plus with  
the button on the steering wheel.  
The icon for Assisted Driving Mode  
Plus is shown in green.  
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the  
steering wheel.  
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is  
shown in green.  
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-  
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-  
ment cluster:  
The system begins to assist the driver with  
vehicle control.  
▷
▷
▷
Green: the system is active.  
Yellow: system will be interrupted.  
Red: system will be deactivated.  
218  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
System limits  
Functional requirements  
General information  
▷
The functional requirements of the Steering  
Assistant are fulfilled.  
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-  
ply.  
Functional requirements, refer to page 214.  
Additional information:  
▷
Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-  
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-  
ing traffic such as crash barriers.  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
Driver Attention Camera  
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-  
tem apply.  
▷
▷
Crossable lane boundaries are detected.  
Maximum speed approx.  
110 mph/180 km/h.  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
The minimum speed is country-specific.  
Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 191.  
The function must be available in the coun-  
try in which the vehicle is driven.  
Lane Change Assistant  
Turning on/turning off Lane Change  
Assistant  
Principle  
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when  
changing lanes on multi-lane roads.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Driving"  
General information  
The system uses the sensors of the Steering  
Assistant.  
6. "Assisted Driving"  
7. "Lane Change Assistant"  
Safety information  
Changing lanes  
Warning  
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits  
changing lanes.  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
2. Press the turn signal lever in the desired  
direction to the resistance point.  
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-  
tant apply.  
Additional information:  
219  
 
 
Driver assistance systems  
CONTROLS  
A supporting steering movement in the re-  
quired direction can be detected a short  
time later.  
displayed in the Assisted View of the instru-  
ment cluster.  
Additional information:  
Assisted View, refer to page 146.  
System limits  
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-  
ply.  
Additional information:  
Steering Assistant, refer to page 214.  
After the lane change, the system helps keep  
the vehicle in the new lane.  
Canceling a lane change  
The lane change can be canceled by steering  
movement into the opposite direction.  
Displays in the instrument cluster  
Icon  
Description  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Green arrow icon for lane-changing.  
The system carries out a lane  
change.  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Gray line for lane marking on the ap-  
propriate side.  
The system detected the lane change  
request. Lane change not currently  
possible.  
Depending on the national-market  
version:  
Green steering wheel icon.  
Gray arrow icon for lane-changing.  
Lane change not possible; functional  
requirements not met.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, information for the system is  
220  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking  
Safety information  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Parking assistance systems  
General information  
The parking assistance systems include differ-  
ent individual systems. The individual systems  
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or  
reversing by providing various assistance func-  
tions, sensors, and camera views.  
Overview  
Button in the vehicle  
Additional information:  
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 226.  
Automatic camera perspective, refer to  
page 226.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 227.  
3D view, refer to page 228.  
Car wash view, refer to page 228.  
Panorama View, refer to page 228.  
Door opening angle, refer to page 230.  
Remote 3D View, refer to page 230.  
Park Distance Control, refer to page 231.  
Park assistance button  
Panorama View  
Active Park Distance Control, refer to  
page 234.  
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to  
page 235.  
Sensors  
The parking assistance systems are controlled  
by the following sensors:  
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 239.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
221  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Display  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Principle  
With the Park Distance Control display and  
various camera views, the parking assistance  
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse  
your vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Operating concept  
The camera-based individual systems are op-  
erated with the function bars on the control  
display. The camera views can be viewed by  
selecting the appropriate icon.  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, one or more  
cameras capture the area from different se-  
lectable perspectives.  
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance  
systems can be configured individually.  
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-  
ings or a part of it is depicted.  
Some parking assistance systems can be  
started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving  
in/out of a parking space with the Automatic  
Parking Assistant.  
Depending on national-market version, the au-  
tomatic camera perspective or the rearview  
camera is displayed.  
Additional information:  
Turning display on/off  
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to  
page 54.  
General information  
The parking assistance systems view switches  
off automatically when driving forwards or if a  
certain distance or speed is exceeded.  
Calling up Park menu  
Via Parking Assistant button  
With reverse gear  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-  
play is automatically switched on if selector  
lever position R is engaged.  
1.  
Press the button.  
"Settings"  
2.  
3. Select the desired settings.  
With the Park Assist key  
Via iDrive  
Press the button.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
Display on the control display  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. Select the desired settings.  
General information  
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the  
activated parking assistance system, the con-  
trol display will vary.  
222  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Without Parking Assistant Plus  
The Park Distance Control view is dis-  
played.  
▷
▷
▷
"Parking"  
The view of different camera perspectives  
is displayed.  
"3D view"  
A three-dimensional view of the vehicle is  
displayed.  
"Car wash"  
Your own lane can be displayed to make it  
easier to drive into a car wash.  
1
Toolbar, left  
2
3
4
Camera image  
Vehicle top view  
Toolbar, right  
Toolbar, right  
The parking assistance functions are displayed  
in the right toolbar. The display may vary de-  
pending on vehicle equipment.  
With Parking Assistant Plus  
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.  
"Autom. Parking"  
Functions of the Automatic Parking Assis-  
tant.  
▷
▷
"Back-Up Assistant"  
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.  
"Settings"  
Settings in the Park menu.  
1
Toolbar, left  
Status of parking assistance  
systems  
The status of active parking assistance sys-  
tems is indicated by icons in the right-hand  
toolbar.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image  
Selection window  
Automatic camera perspective  
Side view  
Rearview camera  
Toolbar, right  
Toolbar, left  
Different views can be selected using the left  
toolbar depending on vehicle equipment:  
▷
"Rear view camera"  
The view of the rearview camera is dis-  
played.  
▷
"Only park. sensors"  
223  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Meaning  
Parking aid lines  
Icon  
No search for Automatic Parking  
Assistant offers.  
Pathway lines  
Automatic Parking Assistant has  
failed.  
Search for Automatic Parking As-  
sistant offers is active.  
Automatic Parking Assistant: if the  
icon is green, the Automatic Parking  
Assistant is active. The system as-  
sumes vehicle control.  
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space  
required when parking and maneuvering on  
level roads.  
Back-up Assistant: if the icon is  
green, the Back-up Assistant is ac-  
tive. The system takes over the  
steering.  
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind  
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.  
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted  
to the steering movements depending on the  
steering-wheel angle.  
Additional displays  
General information  
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-  
era image of the display of the parking assis-  
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make  
parking and maneuvering easier.  
Turning circle lines  
Several additional displays can be active at the  
same time.  
Turning additional displays on/off  
Via Parking Assistant button  
1. Enable the camera image.  
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed  
on the camera image together with pathway  
lines.  
2.  
"Settings"  
3. Select the desired settings.  
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-  
sible turning circle on a level road.  
Via iDrive  
1.  
Apps menu  
Only one turning circle line is displayed after  
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-  
gle.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. Select the desired setting.  
224  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Using parking aid lines  
System limits  
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning  
circle line leads to within the limits of the  
parking space.  
Safety information  
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where  
the green pathway line covers the corre-  
sponding turning circle line.  
Warning  
Because of system limitations, this system  
may either not respond, or respond too late,  
incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk  
of accident, injury, or property damage. Ac-  
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the in-  
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding  
the scope of the system’s operation and limi-  
tations.  
Obstacle marking  
System limits of the sensors  
Additional information:  
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.  
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.  
Field of view  
Because of the camera angle, the areas under  
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.  
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance  
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-  
age.  
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in  
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.  
Detection of objects  
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding  
objects such as ledges may not be detected by  
the system.  
Functional limitations  
The system can be used only to a limited ex-  
tent in the following situations:  
Objects shown on the control display may be  
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the  
distance to the objects on the control display.  
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.  
With open cargo area.  
With exterior mirrors folded in.  
The camera's detection range can be limited  
by protruding cargo or a rear carrier.  
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the  
camera image identify areas that are currently  
not shown such as an open door.  
Malfunction  
A camera failure is displayed on the control  
display.  
The malfunctioning camera's detection range  
is shown by the shaded area on the control  
display.  
225  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
With Parking Assistant Plus  
Rearview camera  
1.  
Press the button.  
Principle  
2.  
Select the icon in the selection window.  
The rearview camera helps when reverse  
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the  
vehicle is shown on the control display.  
To exit the rearview camera view, select  
another camera view in the selection win-  
dow.  
Additional views can be shown on the display,  
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.  
Deactivated rearview camera  
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for  
instance when the trunk is open, the camera  
image is displayed with gray shading.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Functional requirements  
Automatic camera  
perspective  
▷
The trunk is fully closed.  
▷
The camera area is clean and clear.  
Principle  
Turning the rearview camera on/off  
The automatic camera perspective shows a  
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-  
ing direction.  
Turning the camera view on  
automatically  
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-  
ing situation.  
When drive-ready state is switched on, the  
rearview camera is automatically switched on  
if selector lever position R is engaged.  
General information  
Turning the camera view off  
automatically  
The rearview camera turns off automatically  
when driving forward or when a certain dis-  
tance or speed is exceeded.  
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view  
changes to a fixed display of the area in front  
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side  
Park Distance Control as necessary.  
When the reverse gear is engaged, the auto-  
matic camera perspective is exited if necessary  
and the rearview camera view is displayed.  
If necessary, select the automatic camera per-  
spective when reverse gear is engaged. The  
automatic camera perspective will then be  
maintained for the current parking operation.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Without Parking Assistant Plus  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon on the left toolbar.  
To exit the rearview camera view, select  
another camera view on the left toolbar.  
226  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Display  
Turning the automatic camera  
perspective on/off  
Turning the camera view on/off  
automatically  
When the parking assistance systems' display  
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is  
selected automatically.  
The icon in the selection window is selected  
automatically.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,  
select another camera view in the selection  
window.  
▷
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.  
Turning the camera view on/off  
manually  
Color marks: warning against detected ob-  
stacles.  
System limits  
1.  
Press the button.  
The system only displays stationary obstacles  
that were previously detected by sensors while  
passing them.  
2.  
Select the icon in the selection window.  
To exit the steering-dependent camera  
view, select another camera view in the se-  
lection window.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-  
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the  
display after a certain time. The area next to  
the vehicle must be newly captured.  
Side protection  
Principle  
The side Park Distance Control is automati-  
cally displayed when the automatic camera  
perspective is turned on. The function shows  
obstacles located next to the vehicle.  
Side view  
Principle  
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-  
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at  
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
The side view looks from rear to front and, in  
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-  
sible obstacles.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
227  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Turning the side view on/off  
The selection window lets you choose the side  
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Turning the car wash view on/off  
1.  
Press the button.  
2.  
Select the icon for the desired vehicle  
side in the selection window.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "Car wash"  
To exit the side view, select another cam-  
era view in the selection window.  
To exit the car wash view, select a different  
camera view in the left toolbar.  
3D view  
Display  
Principle  
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the  
vehicle top view in the selection window.  
Specified perspectives can be selected on the  
circle.  
General information  
The current perspective is marked with a cam-  
era icon.  
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving  
into a car wash.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
This view can be used to position the vehicle  
correctly within the washing system guide rails.  
Turning the 3D view on/off  
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll  
freely forward.  
Additional information:  
1.  
2. "3D view"  
To exit the 3D view, select another camera  
Press the button.  
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to  
page 119.  
view on the left toolbar.  
Panorama View  
Car wash view  
Principle  
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view  
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and  
intersections.  
Principle  
The car wash view helps when driving into a  
car wash.  
228  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-  
tion, the camera view of the rearview camera  
or front camera will be displayed.  
General information  
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left  
and right of the vehicle can only be detected  
relatively late from the driver's seat. The front  
camera and rearview camera capture the area  
around the side of the vehicle to improve the  
driver's view.  
Automatic activation of panorama  
view  
This function can be turned on automatically  
by saving activation points.  
Principle  
Positions at which panorama view should  
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-  
vation points.  
The camera image shows different levels of  
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-  
ble for distance estimations.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function  
can be used when driving forward or in re-  
verse.  
General information  
Up to ten activation points can be stored.  
The activation points can be used when driv-  
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-  
ket version, when reversing.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance  
systems chapter.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
Rearview camera.  
Front camera.  
▷
A GPS signal must be received.  
▷
Depending on national-market version: A  
BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.  
Turning the panoramic view on/off  
▷
▷
The reversing camera and front camera  
must be installed.  
Press the button.  
The direction of travel, selector lever posi-  
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to  
a stored activation point.  
Display  
Storing activation points  
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you  
want the system to turn on, then stop.  
2.  
Press the button.  
3. "Activation point"  
The current position is displayed.  
4. "Save activation point"  
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the  
bumpers of your own vehicle.  
Activation points are stored with one of the  
following pieces of information if possible:  
229  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
With the city/town and the street.  
With the GPS coordinates.  
Display  
Using activation points  
The use of activation points can be switched  
on and off.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "Settings"  
3. "GPS-based"  
Displaying activation points  
The maximum opening angle of the doors is  
displayed in selector lever position P.  
1.  
Press the button.  
2. "Manage points"  
System limits  
The system does not provide a warning of ap-  
proaching road users.  
A list of all activation points is displayed.  
Editing activation points  
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the  
display for technical reasons.  
1.  
Press the button.  
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the  
control display does not overlap with any other  
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to  
other objects.  
2. "Manage points"  
A list of all activation points is displayed.  
3. Select an activation point as needed.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding  
objects may be closer than they appear on the  
control display.  
Door opening angle  
Remote 3D View  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door  
opening angle display is shown automatically  
when stationary.  
Principle  
The My BMW App and camera views in park-  
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-  
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-  
roundings on a mobile device.  
This display helps estimate how far the doors  
can be opened when parking.  
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking  
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the  
opening angles of the doors.  
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-  
tion.  
230  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark  
fields in the display indicate areas that are  
not recorded by the system.  
General information  
For reasons of data protection, the function  
can only be used three times within two hours.  
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
When other camera functions are being  
performed in the vehicle.  
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking  
speed.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following cam-  
eras:  
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-  
tion.  
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.  
Top view cameras.  
Rearview camera.  
Park Distance Control  
Functional requirements  
Principle  
▷
Data transfer must be activated.  
Park Distance Control assists with parking.  
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles  
in front of or behind the vehicle.  
Data protection, refer to page 65.  
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the  
mobile end device.  
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-  
sonic sensors can also be reported.  
ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with  
an existing ConnectedDrive account must  
be activated.  
General information  
The range of the system, depending on obsta-  
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.  
6 ft/2 m.  
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 66.  
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D  
View  
The function can be activated or deactivated  
individually or together with other functions.  
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-  
pending collision at a distance to the object of  
approx. 27 in/70 cm.  
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic  
warning is issued as early as a distance to the  
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Data privacy"  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
5. Select the desired setting.  
Safety information  
After activation, Remote 3D View can be  
accessed using the My BMW App.  
Warning  
Functional limitations  
The system may not be fully operational or  
may not be available in the following situa-  
tions:  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
231  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "Automatic PDC activation"  
Turning off the system automatically  
When driving forward, the system turns off au-  
tomatically as needed when a certain distance  
or speed is exceeded.  
Warning  
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance  
Control is activated, the warning can be de-  
layed due to physical circumstances. There is  
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.  
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid  
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control  
is not yet active.  
Turning the system on/off manually  
Press the button.  
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.  
Off: the LED goes out.  
If the system is manually switched on when  
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview  
camera image is displayed.  
Sensors  
Depending on the national-market version, the  
system cannot be turned off manually when  
the reverse gear is engaged.  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
Acoustic warning  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
General information  
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle  
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object  
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a  
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.  
Turning Park Distance Control  
on/off  
Turning on the system automatically  
The system switches on automatically in the  
following situations:  
The shorter the distance to the object, the  
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.  
When the distance to a detected object is less  
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is  
sounded.  
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on  
when selector lever position R is engaged.  
▷
While approaching detected obstacles  
if the speed is lower than approx.  
When there are objects in front of and behind  
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance  
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating  
continuous tone will sound between the front  
and rear speakers.  
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance  
depends on the situation in question.  
The automatic activation of detected obstacles  
can be activated or deactivated.  
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone  
are turned off when selector lever position P is  
engaged.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Depending on national-market version, the in-  
termittent tones are switched off after a short  
time when the vehicle is stationary.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
232  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
If an object approaches when the vehicle is  
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.  
Adjusting the volume  
The volume of the acoustic warning can be  
adjusted.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
Example display of warnings behind the vehi-  
cle.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "PDC signal volume"  
7. Set the desired value.  
Visual warning  
General information  
The approach to an object is displayed on the  
control display as soon as the system is acti-  
vated.  
Example display of warnings next to the vehi-  
cle.  
Objects that are farther away are already dis-  
played before a signal sounds.  
▷
▷
Shaded area: Sensor detection range.  
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning  
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown  
for a better estimation of the space required.  
Gray shaded area: No obstacles have been  
detected within the detection range.  
▷
▷
Colored marks in shaded area: Obstacles  
have been detected within the detection  
range.  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the sensor  
detection range is shown by the shaded, ring-  
shaped area. Green, yellow, and red markings  
indicate when obstacles are detected within  
the detection range.  
Shaded area interrupted: the area next to  
the vehicle has not yet been detected.  
If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warn-  
ing: A warning is also shown on the display for  
vehicles approaching from the side at the rear  
and front.  
System limits  
General information  
The function for protecting the vehicle sides  
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-  
viously detected by the sensors when passing  
by.  
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle  
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-  
hicle.  
The system does not detect whether an obsta-  
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-  
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are  
Display  
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings  
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-  
hind the vehicle.  
233  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
hidden after a certain time. The area on the  
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.  
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly  
press the accelerator pedal and release as  
needed.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,  
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-  
ble at any time.  
Unwarranted warnings  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-  
ranted warnings.  
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance  
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-  
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Malfunction  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
An icon is displayed on the control dis-  
play.  
Depending on vehicle equipment: The  
sensor detection range may not be shown on  
the control display.  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the  
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-  
ter or another qualified service center or repair  
shop.  
Sensors  
The system is controlled by the following sen-  
sors:  
Active Park Distance Control  
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.  
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
Principle  
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-  
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute  
risk of collision.  
Deactivating Active Park Distance  
Control temporarily  
After emergency braking, the function can be  
temporarily deactivated on the control display.  
A corresponding message is displayed.  
General information  
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-  
vented under all circumstances.  
1. "Configure"  
The function is available below walking speed  
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.  
2. "Deactivate temporarily"  
During continued driving in this surrounding  
situation, no further emergency braking will  
occur.  
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the  
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not  
performed.  
The function is automatically reactivated when  
Park Distance Control is switched on again.  
After emergency braking to a stop, further  
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-  
234  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
The operating principle and operation of the  
system is divided into the following steps:  
Settings  
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle  
will be protected by the system.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.  
Turning on.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Parking.  
2. "Vehicle"  
Driving out of parking spaces.  
3. "Driving settings"  
The parking manoeuver while parking is per-  
formed automatically.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"  
7. Select the desired setting.  
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,  
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it  
reaches a position where it can be driven out  
of the parking space without further steering  
movements.  
Display  
As soon as the system engages, an  
icon is displayed with a corresponding  
message.  
General information  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
System limits  
Safety information  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Automatic Parking Assistant  
Principle  
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support  
when parallel parking and parking transverse  
to the road.  
In addition, the system makes it easier to park  
out of parallel parking spaces.  
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of  
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-  
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the  
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The  
system status is displayed.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
The system calculates the best possible park-  
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,  
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.  
235  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Parking methods  
Functional requirements  
Park Assist supports the following functions:  
Measurement of parking spaces  
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-  
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.  
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-  
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Suitable parking space  
Longitudinal parking:  
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the  
road.  
Minimum length of gap between two ob-  
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.  
2.6 ft/0.8 m.  
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
Perpendicular parking:  
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a  
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.  
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle  
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.  
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.  
Perpendicular parking: reverse parking per-  
pendicular to the road.  
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces  
must be estimated by the driver. Due to  
technical limitations, the system is only able  
to approximate the depth of perpendicular  
parking spaces.  
Parking operation  
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.  
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.  
Leaving parking spaces  
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.  
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-  
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has  
been detected in the area around the vehi-  
cle.  
Sensors  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled  
by the following sensors:  
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-  
verse, and objects have been detected in  
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-  
ers.  
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.  
236  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-  
ches/15 cm.  
At the end of the parking operation, selec-  
tor lever position P is set.  
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m  
longer than the vehicle.  
The end of the parking operation is indi-  
cated on the control display.  
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if  
needed.  
Turning the signal tone on/off  
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces  
can be turned on and off.  
Driving out of a parking space using  
the Automatic Parking Assistant  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Driving settings"  
2.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
4. "Driver Assistance"  
5. "Parking and maneuvering"  
6. "Sound when available"  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
3. Select the desired direction for driving out  
of the parking space on the control display.  
Parking using the Automatic  
Parking Assistant  
1. For the parking space search when driving  
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to  
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of  
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
Green: the system takes control of ma-  
neuvering.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
The parking space search is activated.  
A message will be displayed at the end of  
the maneuver.  
2. Press the  
gear.  
button or engage reverse  
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits  
driving out of parking space and driving off  
as usual.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
The status of the parking space search and  
possible parking spaces are displayed on  
the control display.  
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned  
off automatically.  
3. Select suggested parking method.  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant manually  
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-  
celed manually at any time, e.g.:  
Green: the system takes control of the  
parking operation.  
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play.  
▷
Press the button.  
The speed can be reduced with the brake.  
Other interventions will cancel the system.  
▷
"Autom. Parking": select the icon on the  
control display.  
Depending on national-market version, an  
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for  
Park Distance Control.  
237  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Canceling Automatic Parking  
Assistant automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
System limits  
General information  
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
No parking assistance  
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-  
fer assistance in the following situations:  
▷
▷
Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.  
When there are obstacles that are hard to  
overcome such as curbs.  
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.  
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-  
pear.  
For diagonal parking spaces.  
For parking spaces that are only marked  
with lines on the ground. The system ori-  
ents itself according to objects.  
With insufficient distances, which are indi-  
cated by Park Distance Control.  
When a maximum number of parking at-  
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-  
ceeded.  
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered  
parking spaces with automatic locking  
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-  
tems.  
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on  
the control display.  
Under certain environmental conditions, park-  
ing out with Park Assist may be temporarily  
unavailable. The system limits of the Park Dis-  
tance Control and the Automatic Parking As-  
sistant continue to apply.  
The turn signal opposite to the desired  
parking side is switched on.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
With open cargo area.  
With the doors open.  
When setting the parking brake.  
Functional limitations  
The system may be limited in the following  
situations:  
When operating the accelerator pedal or  
the selector lever.  
▷
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed for  
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.  
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel  
roads.  
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.  
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.  
A Check Control message is displayed where  
applicable.  
On steep uphill or downhill grades.  
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the  
parking space.  
Continuing the parking operation  
If parking or leaving a parking space has been  
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if  
needed.  
▷
▷
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured  
parking space.  
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge  
of a port.  
Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant and  
follow the instructions on the control display.  
Parking spaces that are not suitable may  
be detected or suitable parking spaces may  
not be detected at all.  
238  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Malfunction  
A Check Control message is displayed.  
Warning  
The system can steer the vehicle over or  
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Watch surrounding  
traffic closely and actively intervene where  
appropriate  
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-  
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-  
ized service center or another qualified service  
center or repair shop.  
Back-up assistant  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store  
the distance covered.  
Principle  
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,  
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-  
ing or road situations.  
To store the distance covered, do not drive  
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.  
Dynamic Stability Control is activated.  
General information  
Driving in reverse with automated  
steering  
1. Turn on drive-ready state.  
The vehicle stores the driving movements of  
the last distance covered. This stored distance  
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-  
ing.  
The system takes over the steering. The driver  
must control the speed using the accelerator  
and brake pedals.  
2.  
3.  
With the vehicle at a standstill, press  
button or engage reverse gear.  
The parking assistance systems view is  
displayed.  
A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored.  
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-  
tance systems" chapter.  
"Back-Up Assistant"  
Follow the instructions on the control dis-  
play where required.  
Safety information  
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and  
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-  
tor pedal and the brake.  
Warning  
The system cannot serve as a substitute for  
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing  
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of  
the system, it cannot independently react to  
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-  
dent, injury, or property damage. Adjust driv-  
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch the sur-  
rounding traffic situation closely, be ready to  
take over steering and braking at any time,  
and actively intervene where appropriate.  
Green: the system takes control of  
steering.  
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-  
cle's surroundings.  
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and  
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the  
instructions for Park Distance Control.  
5. Right before the end of the stored distance  
covered, a signal tone will sound and a  
message is displayed.  
239  
 
 
Parking  
CONTROLS  
Stop no later than when normal road traffic  
is reached and take control of the vehicle  
such as by shifting to forward gear.  
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.  
4 mph/7 km/h.  
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the  
function is interrupted.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
manually  
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-  
tant can be canceled manually:  
▷
After driving a stored distance covered with  
major steering-wheel angles, the function  
of the system will be limited for the return  
trip.  
Different influences can lead to side deviations  
when driving the stored distance covered in re-  
verse. For example, this includes the following  
factors:  
▷
▷
Via touchscreen:  
"Back-Up Assistant"  
Press the button.  
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is  
stationary while storing the distance cov-  
ered.  
Canceling the Back-up Assistant  
automatically  
The system automatically cancels in situations  
such as the following:  
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance  
covered.  
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-  
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel  
or takes over steering.  
Greatly deviating conditions when storing  
and driving the route, for instance other  
tires or changed ambient conditions like  
weather.  
When shifting from reverse gear to another  
selector lever position.  
During activation or intervention by driver  
assistance systems.  
Also follow the information on system limits in  
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.  
After an extended period of time when the  
vehicle is stationary.  
When exiting the stored lane when revers-  
ing, for instance with maximum steering-  
wheel angle.  
▷
When the view on the control display is  
overlaid with messages.  
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.  
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a  
slope.  
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.  
6 mph/9 km/h.  
System limits  
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is  
limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.  
240  
 
 
Driving comfort  
CONTROLS  
Driving comfort  
Vehicle features and options BMW IconicSounds  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-  
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be  
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.  
1.  
Apps menu  
Additional information:  
2. "Vehicle"  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
3. "Driving settings"  
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"  
5. "IconicSounds"  
Adaptive M chassis  
6. Select the desired setting.  
Principle  
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, con-  
trollable sport chassis.  
The chassis reduces body movements with a  
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.  
General information  
The intelligent control of the chassis increases  
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de-  
pending on the road condition and driving  
style.  
Setting  
The system offers different shock absorber  
settings ranging from comfortable travel to  
sporty driving.  
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending  
on the selected driving mode as well as the  
road condition and driving style.  
Additional information:  
Driving Experience Control, refer to page 123.  
241  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Climate control  
Icon  
Function  
Vehicle features and options  
Fresh air.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Air flow.  
Additional information:  
Air distribution.  
SYNC program.  
Seat heating.  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Climate control  
Overview  
Functions in the Climate menu  
Active seat ventilation.  
Steering wheel heating.  
Icon  
Function  
Turn the climate control sys-  
tem on/off.  
Automatic program.  
Temperature.  
Buttons, automatic climate control  
Air conditioning.  
Maximum cooling.  
Air recirculation mode.  
Icon  
Function  
Defrost function.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
trol.  
Rear window defroster.  
242  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Calling up climate control functions  
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:  
Automatic program  
Principle  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on  
the menu bar.  
The automatic program ensures a comforta-  
ble climate, which can be modified with the  
desired temperature and individual settings.  
Or:  
1.  
Apps menu  
The automatic program cools, ventilates or  
heats the vehicle interior automatically.  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "Climate control"  
General information  
Depending on the equipment, the automatic  
program provides the best possible settings  
for climate control functions depending on  
the outside temperature, interior temperature,  
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-  
perature setting:  
Turning the air conditioning system  
on/off  
The climate control system can be turned on or  
off via iDrive.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air flow.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Air distribution.  
Temperature.  
Seat heating.  
Active seat ventilation.  
2.  
Tap the power button.  
The entire climate control system is turned on  
or off with the last settings applied.  
The automatic program takes seat occupancy  
into account, regulating the climate in an en-  
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-  
cupants.  
When the air conditioning system is turned  
on, individual climate control functions can be  
turned off.  
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-  
trols the automatic program in order to prevent  
window condensation to the extent possible.  
Settings  
You can configure individual settings for cli-  
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:  
Overview  
▷
▷
Intensity of seat heating.  
Pre-ventilation.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"  
3. Select the desired setting.  
1
Settings  
2
Air flow intensity  
243  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Display  
3
4
5
Climate control functions bar  
Temperature  
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-  
mation about the temperature difference be-  
tween the configured desired temperature and  
current interior temperature.  
Seat heating  
Steering wheel heating  
Active seat ventilation  
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature  
display indicates the progress of heating or  
cooling.  
Turning the automatic program  
on/off  
The AUTO program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive.  
▷
The desired interior temperature is reached  
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.  
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat  
heating, are indicated by the icons on the  
menu bar.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Temperature  
2.  
Tap the AUTO program button.  
Principle  
The automatic climate control cools or heats  
to the configured temperature and then keeps  
the temperature constant.  
Setting the intensity  
When the automatic program is activated,  
the intensity of individual climate control func-  
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-  
ally.  
General information  
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-  
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-  
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-  
just the set temperature.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "Individual settings"  
Setting the temperature  
3. Select the desired setting.  
Each level has a specific control range of the  
intensity.  
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-  
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is  
not necessary to manually change the desired  
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.  
The individually selected settings of the cli-  
mate control functions are stored and auto-  
matically set up again such as after the vehicle  
is started again.  
You can set the desired temperature for driver  
and front passenger individually on the menu  
bar.  
244  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.  
Lower the temperature.  
▷
▷
Tap the large air flow icon to increase the  
air flow.  
Tap the small air flow icon to reduce the air  
flow.  
Upper body temperature  
Manual mode:  
▷
▷
Tap up arrow: Increase air flow.  
Tap down arrow: Reduce air flow.  
General information  
The air temperature in the upper body area  
can be adjusted.  
This does not change the set interior tempera-  
ture for the driver and front passenger.  
Air distribution settings  
Principle  
Adjusting the upper body temperature  
In manual mode, the air distribution can be  
adjusted as needed.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Adjusting the air distribution  
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:  
2. "Individual settings"  
3. "Temp. adjustment upper body"  
4. Increase or decrease temperature.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Air flow  
2.  
Tap the air distribution icon on the  
climate control functions bar.  
3. Select the desired setting:  
Principle  
The air flow generated by the blower can be  
adjusted as needed.  
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow downward, arrow 1.  
Aim the air flow upward, arrow 2.  
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the  
vehicle battery.  
Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-  
row 3.  
Adjusting the air flow  
The air flow can be set via iDrive.  
The selected air distribution is displayed.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Select the desired setting.  
Automatic program:  
245  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Functional requirement  
The following functional requirements must be  
met for maximum cooling:  
Air conditioning  
Principle  
▷
The outside temperature is higher than ap-  
prox. 32℉ / 0℃.  
With the climate control function, the air inside  
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then  
warmed again depending on the temperature  
settings.  
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.  
Turning maximum cooling on/off  
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via  
iDrive:  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
Switching the cooling function on/off  
The air conditioning can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2.  
Tap the maximum cooling button.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body  
area. Open the vents.  
2.  
Tap the air conditioning button.  
Air recirculation mode  
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-  
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid  
window condensation.  
Principle  
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-  
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-  
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The  
system then recirculates the interior air.  
Depending on the weather, the windshield and  
the side windows may fog up briefly when  
drive-ready state is switched on.  
When using the cooling mode, condensation  
that will exit below the vehicle.  
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-  
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated  
depending on the outside air quality.  
Maximum cooling  
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside  
air is directed into the interior.  
Principle  
General information  
If there is window condensation, turn off the air  
recirculation.  
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-  
terior quickly and effectively.  
The lowest temperature and the maximum air  
flow are set automatically.  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
The function is automatically activated in the  
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.  
246  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Turning air recirculation on/off  
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or  
off via iDrive:  
General information  
The following settings can be transferred:  
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.  
Air distribution.  
Automatic program.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Turning the SYNC program on/off  
The SYNC program can be switched on or off  
via iDrive:  
2. The current operating mode is displayed on  
the climate control functions bar. Tap the  
button until the desired operating mode is  
set.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.  
Fresh air.  
2.  
Tap the SYNC program button.  
If the settings on the front passenger side are  
changed, the program turns off automatically.  
Automatic recirculated-air con-  
trol.  
In recirculated-air mode, the air conditioning  
turns on automatically to dry the air and pre-  
vent condensation.  
Defrost function  
Principle  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recir-  
culation turns off automatically after some time  
based on the ambient conditions in order to  
prevent condensation.  
With the defrost function, ice and condensation  
are quickly removed from the windshield and  
the front side windows.  
The air flow and air temperature are automati-  
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-  
densation.  
SYNC program  
The air distribution is directed toward the  
windshield and front side windows.  
Principle  
If SYNC program is activated, the settings on  
the driver's side are transfered to the passeng-  
er's side and to the rear.  
If there is window condensation, turn on the  
automatic program to take advantage of the  
condensation sensor.  
If the SYNC program is deactivated, the follow-  
ing settings are made automatically in the au-  
tomatic program depending on the seat occu-  
pancy:  
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear  
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-  
vide maximum performance.  
▷
If the front passenger's seat is not occu-  
pied, the settings on the driver's side are  
applied.  
Turning the defrost function on/off  
Press the defrost button on the instru-  
ment panel.  
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the  
default settings are applied.  
247  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The LED of the button is illuminated when the  
system is switched on.  
Adjusting seat heating  
Automatic program  
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-  
shield and front side windows.  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As  
you drive, the heater output is automatically  
adjusted according to your set intensity.  
Rear window defroster  
Adjusting seat heating manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
Principle  
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-  
densation are quickly removed from the rear  
window.  
Functional requirement  
Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.  
Turning the rear window defroster  
on/off  
Press the rear window heating button  
on the instrument panel.  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
The LED in the button illuminates  
when the rear window heating is turned on.  
2.  
Press the seat heating button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
The rear window defroster switches off auto-  
matically after a certain period of time.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
Seat heating  
Principle  
The system heats the seats as necessary.  
Active seat ventilation  
Principle  
General information  
The system cools the seat and backrest sur-  
faces as necessary, ensuring a pleasant seat  
temperature.  
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-  
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions  
are turned on automatically with the tempera-  
ture that was last set.  
Adjusting active seat ventilation  
Automatic program  
When the AUTO program is on, the intensity  
of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you  
248  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted  
according to the set intensity.  
Adjusting the active seat ventilation  
manually  
The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:  
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
2.  
Press the steering wheel heating  
button repeatedly until the desired level is  
selected, arrow 2.  
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-  
lected, the heater output is reduced.  
1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the  
menu bar, arrow 1.  
2.  
Press the seat ventilation button re-  
peatedly until the desired level is selected,  
arrow 2.  
Ventilation  
Principle  
The ventilation system offers individual adjust-  
ment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in or-  
der to optimize the flow of air within the vehi-  
cle.  
Steering wheel heating  
Principle  
The system heats the steering wheel as nec-  
essary.  
General information  
Open the air vents and position them to ensure  
effective climate control.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-  
ing on the set desired temperature.  
Automatic program  
When the automatic program is activated, the  
intensity of steering wheel heating can be ad-  
justed. As you drive, the heater output is auto-  
matically adjusted according to your set inten-  
sity.  
Adjusting steering wheel heating  
manually  
The heater output level can be adjusted man-  
ually:  
249  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Front ventilation  
Air quality  
General information  
The air quality in the interior is improved by the  
following components:  
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.  
Interior filter.  
Air conditioning system to control the  
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air  
mode.  
Setting the air flow direction and air volume at  
the vent.  
▷
Pre-ventilation.  
▷
Changing the air flow direction: press the  
button in the desired air flow direction.  
Interior filter  
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh  
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation  
mode.  
▷
Changing the air volume:  
▷
Turn the knob clockwise: increase the  
air volume.  
Depending on the equipment:  
▷
Turn the knob counterclockwise to de-  
crease the air volume.  
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-  
flowing air.  
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.  
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.  
Ventilation in the rear  
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens  
are filtered.  
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  
having the interior filter changed during vehicle  
maintenance.  
Pre-ventilation  
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-  
row 1.  
Principle  
Knurled wheel for variable opening and  
closing of the air vents, arrow 2.  
The car's interior can be cooled or heated  
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-  
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-  
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-  
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.  
Setting the ventilation  
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the  
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-  
sengers.  
General information  
The system can be switched on and off directly  
or via a preset departure time.  
250  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The activation time is determined based on  
the outside temperature. The system promptly  
switches on before the selected departure  
time.  
On the desired weekdays, the system will  
be switched on before the set departure  
time.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
The system switches off automatically after a  
certain period of time. The system continues to  
run for some time after being switched off.  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Activate departure times.  
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-  
tween setting and activating the departure  
time and the planned departure time to allow a  
sufficient period of time for the climate control.  
Functional requirements  
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.  
Setting the departure time  
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle  
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the  
maximum activation time to save the vehi-  
cle battery. The system will be available  
again after the engine is started or after a  
short trip.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.  
The ventilation air vents are open.  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Select the desired departure time.  
6. Set the desired departure time.  
7. Select day of the week, if needed.  
Switching pre-ventilation on/off  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Activating the departure time  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
4. Select the desired setting.  
2. "General settings"  
Departure time  
3. "Pre-ventilation"  
4. "Departure plan"  
General information  
Different departure times can be set to ensure  
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-  
cle at the time of departure.  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
Display on the instrument cluster  
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be  
set.  
Icon  
Description  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
The system is switched on once.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week can be set.  
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-  
tion is switched on.  
251  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
leaves or grass come in contact with hot  
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-  
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make  
sure that no combustible materials can come  
in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-  
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,  
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible  
objects.  
Activating with My BMW App  
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW  
App with remote functionality can be used to  
turn on precooling at a preset departure time  
or immediately.  
Pre-conditioning through  
Remote Engine Start  
Functional requirements  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.  
Battery is sufficiently charged.  
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.  
Hood is closed.  
Principle  
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-  
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable  
temperature. The system automatically cools,  
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-  
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may  
be removed more easily.  
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time  
are set correctly.  
▷
Air vents are opened.  
The system starts the engine automatically  
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.  
Enabling the automatic engine start  
function  
Safety information  
The automatic engine start must be enabled  
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-  
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-  
tize the car's interior.  
DANGER  
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation  
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-  
lute the area in and around the vehicle or  
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases  
contain pollutants which are colorless and  
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-  
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also  
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a  
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and  
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on  
stationary climate control in enclosed areas  
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in  
enclosed garages.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Remote Engine Start"  
5. "Start engine for climate cont."  
6. Confirm the disclaimer.  
Turning on/turning off the pre-  
conditioning  
Warning  
General information  
The system switches off automatically after  
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.  
When stationary climate control is in opera-  
tion, high temperatures can occur underneath  
the body, for instance caused by the exhaust  
system. If combustible materials such as  
252  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
The system can be switched on a maximum of  
two times in a row.  
The system is switched on once.  
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day  
of the week of the scheduled departure can  
be set.  
The system will be available again as soon  
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
The departure time is preselected in two steps:  
▷
▷
Set departure times.  
Switching on via iDrive  
Activate departure times.  
The system is activated automatically a few  
minutes before the set departure time. The  
system remains switched on for a short time  
after the set departure time.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Start now"  
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can  
only be activated once for the departure time.  
The system will be available again as soon  
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-  
tivated again.  
Switching on/off via vehicle key  
The system can be switched on and off using  
the vehicle key.  
Observe the information about the intended  
use of the vehicle.  
Press the button on the vehicle key  
three times within 1 second.  
Additional information:  
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.  
After operating the vehicle key, it takes  
approx. 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.  
Setting the departure time  
To switch off the system, press the button  
again three times.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
Turning off with the Start/Stop button  
This system can be turned off directly by push-  
ing the Start/Stop button without depressing  
the brake pedal.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Set the departure time.  
6. Select day of the week, if needed.  
Climate control for departure time  
General information  
Activating the departure time  
Scheduled departure times can be set up in  
the system to ensure a comfortable interior  
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-  
ture.  
1.  
Tap the icon for the Climate menu  
on the menu bar.  
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the  
scheduled departure can be set.  
2. "General settings"  
3. "Pre-conditioning"  
4. "Departure plan"  
5. Activate the desired departure time.  
253  
 
 
Climate control  
CONTROLS  
Display  
In the instrument cluster:  
The engine runs for the purpose  
of operating the pre-condition-  
ing. The vehicle is not ready to  
drive.  
Icon  
Description  
Icon on the instrument  
panel.  
Icon illuminates: a depar-  
ture time is activated.  
Icon flashes: pre-condition-  
ing is switched on.  
Confirmation signals from the  
vehicle  
The activation of the system is confirmed by  
flashing twice.  
The parking lights are switched on as long as  
the system is switched on.  
254  
 
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Interior equipment  
of damage to property. Make sure that the  
travel path of the respective system is clear  
during programming and operation. Also fol-  
low the safety information for the hand-held  
transmitter.  
Vehicle features and options  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Compatibility  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
If this icon is printed on the packaging  
or in the operating instructions of the  
remote-controlled system, the system  
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-  
versal remote control.  
Integrated universal remote  
control  
Additional questions are answered by:  
Principle  
▷
An authorized service center or another  
qualified service center or repair shop.  
The integrated universal remote control in the  
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled  
systems such as garage door openers, alarm  
systems or locking systems.  
▷
on the Internet.  
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex  
Corporation.  
For any additional questions, contact an au-  
thorized service center or another qualified  
service center or repair shop.  
General information  
The integrated universal remote control re-  
places up to three different hand-held trans-  
mitters. To operate the remote control, the  
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-  
grammed with the desired functions.  
Operating elements on the interior  
mirror  
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored  
functions for the sake of security.  
If possible, do not install the antenna of the  
remote-controlled system near metal objects  
to ensure the best possible operation.  
Safety information  
Warning  
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.  
LED, arrow 2.  
The operation of remote-controlled systems  
with the integrated universal remote control  
such as the garage door may result in injury,  
for example, body parts becoming jammed in  
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk  
Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-  
trolled system, arrow 3.  
255  
 
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the button on the interior  
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform  
this procedure three times.  
Programming the integrated  
universal remote control  
If the integrated universal remote con-  
trol remains nonoperational, continue  
with the special features for rolling code  
radio systems.  
Functional requirement  
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must  
be fully charged at the time of programming  
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated  
universal remote control.  
▷
LED does not illuminate green after  
60 seconds: programming not com-  
pleted.  
Programming individual buttons  
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-  
controlled system.  
Repeat steps 3 to 5.  
Special feature of the rolling code  
wireless system  
For systems with a rolling code radio system,  
the integrated universal remote control and the  
system also have to be synchronized.  
2. Turn on standby state.  
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:  
▷
▷
Program available button:  
Press the button.  
Program already assigned button:  
Refer to information on synchronization in the  
operating instructions of the remote-controlled  
system.  
Press and hold the button for approx.  
20 seconds.  
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly  
begin flashing orange.  
1. Program the desired button on the interior  
mirror.  
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the  
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to  
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons  
on the interior mirror.  
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button  
on the remote-controlled system such as  
on the garage door.  
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next  
step.  
The required distance depends on the  
hand-held transmitter.  
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a  
second person.  
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held  
transmitter.  
3. Press and hold the programmed button on  
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.  
Canada: if programming with the hand-held  
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the  
interior mirror button and repeatedly press  
and release the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton for 2 seconds.  
If necessary, repeat this step up to three  
times in order to end synchronization. Once  
synchronization is complete, the program-  
med function will be carried out.  
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:  
Operation  
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-  
tem can be operated with the button on the  
interior mirror.  
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-  
ming completed.  
Release button.  
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly: the  
hand-held transmitter was detected but  
programming is not complete.  
256  
 
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Press and hold the desired button of the re-  
mote-controlled system within range until the  
function is triggered.  
Sockets  
Principle  
The socket can be used for electronic devi-  
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is  
switched on.  
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously  
illuminated green during the transmission of  
the radio signal.  
Deleting a button assignment  
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-  
vidually.  
General information  
The total load of all sockets must not exceed  
140 watts at 12 volts.  
Press and hold the two outer buttons on  
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-  
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green  
rapidly.  
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  
connectors.  
Safety information  
All stored button assignments will be deleted.  
Warning  
Sun visor  
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of  
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-  
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or  
be thrown around in the car's interior while  
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that devices  
and cables are not in the airbag's area of  
unfolding.  
Glare shield  
Fold the sun visor down or up.  
Glare shield from the side  
Folding the sun visor out  
1. Fold the sun visor down.  
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-  
ward the side window.  
Warning  
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-  
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-  
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-  
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk  
of damage to property. Only connect battery  
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-  
start terminals in the engine compartment.  
Folding the sun visor in  
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun  
visor.  
Vanity mirror  
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-  
hind a cover.  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Make sure  
257  
 
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
to prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Safety information  
Warning  
If metal objects fall or are plugged into elec-  
tronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports,  
these objects can cause a short circuit and  
destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Make sure  
to prevent metal objects from falling or being  
plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the  
cigarette lighter or socket cover again after  
using the socket.  
Front center console  
1. Press on the cover.  
In the center armrest  
2. A socket is located between the cup hold-  
ers. Detach the cover.  
A USB port is located in the center armrest.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.  
For charging mobile devices.  
Charge current: max. 3 A.  
USB port  
In the front center console  
General information  
Follow the information regarding the connec-  
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the  
section on USB connections.  
NOTICE  
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,  
large USB connectors, may block or damage  
the cover when it is being opened or closed.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that the area of movement of the cover  
is clear while opening and closing it.  
Additional information:  
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-  
igation, Entertainment, Communication;  
258  
 
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Safety information  
Warning  
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the  
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on  
the tray together with the device can become  
very hot. Storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips, or  
cards for transmitting signals, may not func-  
tion correctly when placed together on the  
tray with the device. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. When charg-  
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no  
objects on the tray together with the device.  
If necessary, push on the cover.  
Overview  
Tray in the center console:  
A USB port is located in the center console.  
Properties:  
▷
▷
USB port Type A.  
For charging mobile devices and for data  
transfer.  
▷
Charge current: max. 1.5 A.  
1
LED  
Wireless charging tray  
2
Storage area  
Principle  
Functional requirements  
The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly  
charge Qi-certified smartphones.  
▷
The smartphone to be charged must be Qi-  
certified.  
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.  
General information  
Smartphone must not exceed maximum di-  
mensions of approx. 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5  
x 80 x 18 mm.  
When inserting the smartphone to be charged,  
make sure that there is nothing between the  
smartphone to be charged and the wireless  
charging tray.  
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-  
able for wireless charging.  
The charging process is shown by the  
charge indicator on the control display.  
The smartphone to be charged is located  
in the center of the tray. The smartphone  
display is facing up.  
259  
 
 
Interior equipment  
CONTROLS  
Inserting a smartphone  
1. Open the tray cover.  
System limits  
The charge current may be reduced or charg-  
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-  
less charging tray in the following situations:  
2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the  
tray, with the display facing up.  
▷
▷
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the tray  
and smartphone.  
3. Close the tray cover.  
If there are objects between the smart-  
phone and wireless charging tray.  
LED displays  
Color Meaning  
If storage media or electronic cards,  
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic  
stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are  
located between the smartphone and wire-  
less charging tray.  
Blue  
Smartphone is charging.  
The blue LED continues to illumi-  
nate when the Qi-capable smart-  
phone is fully charged.  
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that  
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm  
Or-  
Smartphone is not charging.  
ange  
Due to protective sleeves and covers made  
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic  
parts.  
Temperature on the smartphone  
may be too high, or foreign object  
may be in charging tray.  
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for the smartphone,  
e.g., holders.  
Red  
Smartphone is not charging.  
Contact an authorized service center  
or another qualified service center or  
repair shop.  
By configuring the smartphone settings,  
e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions  
given on the control display and smart-  
phone, as applicable.  
Forgotten warning  
General information  
A warning may be issued if a Qi-certified  
smartphone was forgotten in the wireless  
charging tray when leaving the vehicle.  
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-  
strument cluster.  
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning  
1.  
Apps menu  
2. "Vehicle"  
3. "System settings"  
4. "Wireless charging tray"  
5. "Mobile phone reminder"  
260  
 
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Storage compartments  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can  
damage the dashboard. Attached objects  
could come loose. There is a risk of injury  
or risk of damage to property. Do not use  
anti-slip pads.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Glove compartment  
Safety information  
Opening the glove compartment  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
Pull the handle.  
Warning  
Closing the glove compartment  
Open flaps of the storage compartments,  
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,  
protrude into the interior when folded open  
and may be in the way of an airbag that  
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-  
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-  
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in  
the event of an accident or when braking or  
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk  
of injury. Always close storage compartments  
immediately after use.  
Fold the lid closed.  
Locking the glove compartment  
The glove compartment can be locked with  
an integrated key. This prevents access to the  
glove compartment.  
After the glove compartment has been locked,  
the vehicle key can be given to someone with-  
out the integrated key, for example, when the  
car is being parked by a parking attendant.  
Additional information:  
Integrated key, refer to page 71.  
261  
 
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Fold-out compartment  
Storage tray in center  
console  
Opening the fold-out compartment  
Opening the storage compartment  
Press the button and open the cover.  
Press on the cover.  
Storage compartments in  
the doors  
Closing the storage compartment  
Pull the cover on the handle back.  
General information  
There are storage compartments in the doors.  
Front center armrest  
Safety information  
General information  
A storage compartment is located in the center  
armrest between the seats.  
Warning  
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or  
glasses can break in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-  
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-  
rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not use any breakable objects  
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in  
closed storage compartments.  
Opening the center armrest  
Press the button.  
Closing the center armrest  
Press the lid down until it engages.  
262  
 
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
Front cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not force objects into the  
cup holder. Make sure that drink containers  
are secured firmly in the cup holder. Use  
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable con-  
tainers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Two cup holders are located in the center con-  
sole.  
Closing the cup holder  
Pull the cover on the handle back.  
Rear cup holder  
Safety information  
Warning  
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may  
damage the cup holders or be thrown about  
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,  
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.  
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-  
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and  
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can  
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.  
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage  
to property. Do not force objects into the  
cup holder. Make sure that drink containers  
are secured firmly in the cup holder. Use  
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable con-  
tainers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately.  
Do not transport hot beverages.  
Opening the cup holder  
Press on the cover.  
263  
 
 
Storage compartments  
CONTROLS  
NOTICE  
Safety information  
With an open cup holder, the center armrest  
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of  
damage to property. Press back the covers  
before the center armrest is folded up.  
Warning  
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-  
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of  
accident. When suspending clothing articles  
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not  
obstruct the driver's view.  
Opening the cup holder  
1. Fold down the center armrest.  
Warning  
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a  
risk of objects flying about during braking and  
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury  
and risk of damage to property. Only hang  
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-  
cles, from the coat hooks.  
2. Press the button to open the cup holder.  
Closing the cup holder  
Press both covers back inward in sequence  
and fold the center armrest back.  
Coat hooks  
General information  
The coat hooks are located on the door pillar in  
the rear.  
264  
 
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Cargo area  
Vehicle features and options  
Warning  
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be  
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in  
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-  
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit  
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk  
of damage to property. Stow and secure ob-  
jects and cargo properly.  
This chapter describes model-specific equip-  
ment, systems, and functions that are currently  
available, or may become available in the fu-  
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.  
Additional information:  
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.  
Loading  
NOTICE  
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.  
There is a risk of damage to property. Make  
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.  
Safety information  
Warning  
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the  
tires, damage them internally and cause  
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-  
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-  
ducing directional stability, lengthening the  
braking distances and changing the steering  
response. There is a risk of accident, injury,  
or property damage. Pay attention to the  
permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires  
and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle  
weight.  
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should  
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the  
vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers that will be riding in  
the vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-  
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount  
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five  
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the  
amount of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lbs)  
Warning  
When driving, loose items or devices con-  
nected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile  
phones, may be thrown around the vehicle,  
e.g., in the event of an accident or when brak-  
ing or performing evasive maneuvers. There  
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Secure loose objects or devices that are  
connected to the vehicle via a cable.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
265  
 
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear  
seat is not occupied, secure each of the  
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.  
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load  
from your trailer will be transferred to the  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine  
how this reduces the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.  
Lashing eyes in the cargo  
area  
Payload  
General information  
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo  
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw  
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.  
Overview  
The maximum payload is the sum of the  
weight of the occupants and the cargo.  
The greater the weight of the occupants, the  
less cargo that can be transported.  
Stowing and securing cargo  
The lashing eyes are located in the luggage  
compartment.  
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the  
cargo.  
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of  
the backrests.  
Multifunction hook  
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests  
to stow large cargo.  
General information  
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the  
lashing eyes in the cargo area.  
Small and light cargo: secure with tension-  
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-  
gage compartment net.  
▷
▷
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo  
straps.  
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-  
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the  
rear seat backrests.  
A multifunction hook is located on the left and  
right side in the cargo area.  
▷
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as  
possible, directly behind and at the bottom  
266  
 
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded  
down together with the center section.  
Safety information  
The rear seat backrests can be folded down  
from the cargo area. The center section can be  
separately folded down from the rear.  
Warning  
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can  
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-  
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is  
a risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-  
erty. Only hang lightweight objects from the  
multifunction hooks. Heavy luggage in the  
trunk must be properly secured.  
Safety information  
Warning  
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts  
jammed when folding down the rear seat  
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of  
damage to property. Make sure that the area  
of movement of the rear seat backrest includ-  
ing head restraint is clear when folding down.  
Net  
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the  
left side.  
Warning  
Storage compartment on  
the right side  
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-  
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s  
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-  
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There  
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat  
backrest is locked after folding it back.  
A storage compartment is available on the  
right side of the cargo area.  
Storage compartment on  
the left side  
Warning  
The stability of the child restraint system is  
limited or compromised with incorrect seat  
setting or improper installation of the child  
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.  
Make sure that the child restraint system fits  
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-  
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests  
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that  
seats and backrests are securely engaged or  
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the  
height of the head restraints or remove them.  
A storage compartment is located on the left  
side in the cargo area.  
Through-loading system  
Principle  
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding  
down the rear seat backrests.  
General information  
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of  
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and  
the center section can be folded down sepa-  
267  
 
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
Folding down the rear seat backrest  
From the cargo area  
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area  
to release the rear seat backrest.  
▷
Left lever: fold down the left and middle  
rear seat backrest.  
▷
Right lever: fold down the right rear seat  
backrest.  
Folding back the rear seat backrest  
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-  
tion and engage it.  
Folding down middle section  
Pull lever and fold the center section forward.  
268  
 
 
Cargo area  
CONTROLS  
269  
 
 

Related Topics

Dashboard
Sensors of the vehicle
Operating state of the vehicle
BMW iDrive
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Personal settings
Opening and closing
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Transporting children safely
Driving
Displays
Light and view
Safety
Driving stability control systems
Driver assistance systems
Parking
Driving comfort
Climate control
Interior equipment
Storage compartments
Cargo area

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
BMW
Citroen
Ford
Honda
Peugeot

Latest Owner Manuals

First Generation (1995-2006) Ford Galaxy Van First Generation (1995-2006) Ford Galaxy Van
Second Generation (2013-2023) Ford Ecosport SUV Second Generation (2013-2023) Ford Ecosport SUV
Fifth Generation (2012-2020) Ford Explorer SUV Fifth Generation (2012-2020) Ford Explorer SUV
Third Generation (2016-2021) Ford Ka 2 Door Third Generation (2016-2021) Ford Ka 2 Door
Second Generation (2009-2016) Ford Ka 2 Door Second Generation (2009-2016) Ford Ka 2 Door
First Generation (1996-2008) Ford Ka 2 Door First Generation (1996-2008) Ford Ka 2 Door